Apocalypsis Apocalypseos, or, The revelation of St. John the Divine unveiled containing a brief but perspicuous and continued exposition from chapter to chapter, and from verse to verse, of the whole book of the Apocalypse / by Henry More ...

APOCALYPSIS APOCALYPSEOS, OR THE Revelation of S^t John UNVEILED.

CHAPTER I.

1. THe Revelation of Iesus Christ which God gave unto him to shew unto his servants things which must shortly come to pass: Not therefore the Reve∣lation of things * manifestly foreshewn by him al∣ready, or that are already past, so that any entire Visions or Prefigurations should be here expected of them, which would but make them more obscure; but of things which are to come some sooner and some later, but all of them shortly in respect of some successions of Ages in the Church or other, that they

may perpetually be advertised of their concerns, and stand upon their guard. And he sent and signified it by his Angel unto his servant Iohn: This Re∣velation I say was made to Jesus Christ by God, that he might communicate it to his servants; for which end he sent his holy Angel, by whose ministry these things through prophetick Visions and Prefigurations wrought and impressed upon his Inward Man were conveyed to Iohn.

2. Who bare record of the Word of God, and of the testimony of Iesus Christ, and of all things that he saw. This is he who is usually called Iohn the Divine; for giving that Record of the Word of God in the beginning of his Gospel, and of the Divinity of Jesus, and who declared that which was from the beginning, which he had heard, seen and handled of the Word of Life, and did testifie in writing the A∣ctions of Jesus, and all things that he faw.

3. Blessed is he that readeth and they that hear the words of this prophecy, and keep those things that are written therein. That are written in the volume of these Prophecies, consisting chiefly of three parts; the Vision of the Seven Churches, the Vision of the Seven Seals, the seventh whereof contains the seven Trumpets, all which belong to the sealed Book, and the Visions that appertain to the opened Book, (amongst which are the seven Vials) and all the rest of the Visions of this Volume, that some way or o∣ther are reducible to these: Blessed is he that ob∣serves the things written in this Book of Prophecies, that he may order his life accordingly, and alwayes approve himself such as he is by these Visions admo∣nished to be, and adhere to Christ sincerely, and to his True Church in all conditions. For the time is

at hand, namely, for the fulfilling of such Vision as appertain to the earlier Scene of the Affairs of the Church, and will ever be at hand to the end of the world for the fulfilling of some Visions of this Book or other.

4. Iohn to the seven Churches which are in Asia. To the * truly Catholick and Apostolick Church distinguished into seven successions, reaching from the beginning of the Church to the end of the world, * and dispensed on the face of the Earth Grace he unto you and peace, all favour, happiness and prosperity. From him which is, and which was, and which is to come: from the Eternal Je∣hovah, who graspeth all past, present and to come in the eternity of his Wisdom and Power. And from the seven spirits which are before his throne. And from all his holy Angels that are assisting at his Throne, and in a readiness to be sent upon messages, and to minister for the good of his people.

5. And from Iesus Christ who is the faithful Witness, and the first-begotten of the dead, and the Prince of the Kings of the Earth. From Je∣sus Christ that faithful Witness of the Will of his Fa∣ther when he was upon Earth, and the first-begotten of the dead, the first-fruits of them that slept, to whom is given the right of all the Kingdoms of the Earth, to be Prince over them all, and to rule them in Righteousness and Peace: To him that loved us, and washed us from our sins in his own blood, That so loved us, that he laid down his life for us, for a propitiation for our sins, and to wash us from all the silth thereof through sincere repentance and mortification of our lusts out of a due and gratefull return of love to him that died for us.

6. And hath made us Kings and Priests unto God and his Father, namely, by this victory over our corruptions through faith in him, to offer spiri∣tual sacrifices of Prayers and Thanksgiving, with an utter resignation of our selves to the will of God the Father of our Lord Jesus Christ. To him be glory and Dominion for ever and for ever. Amen.

7. Behold he cometh in the clouds, (so vast a prospect have the prophecies of this Book) and will judge the whole world at the last day. And every eye shall see him, and they also that pierced him, either in his own person, or wounded him, and kil∣led him in the persecution and murdering of his liv∣ing members. And all kindreds of the earth shall wail because of him; namely, all those that have thus outragiously sinned against him: Even so A∣men. This is a certain truth, let scoffers and unbe∣lievers say and imagine what they please.

8. And that this may not seem strange, that his Providence and Power reaches so far as to the very last, there is presently added, I am Alpha and O∣mega, the Beginning and the Ending, saith the Lord, which is, and which was, and which is to come, the Almighty: whose administration there∣fore of Affairs, and the presence of his Power is pal∣pably to be felt, and plainly to be discerned from the beginning of the Church to the end of the world. He is the Almighty, grasping all things in the hand of his All-comprehending Providence.

9. I Iohn who also am your brother and com∣panion in tribulation, and in the kingdom and pa∣tience of Iesus Christ, both which he hath be∣queathed to his faithfull followers. Was in the Isle that is called Patmos, one of the Cyclades so called

in the Aegean Sea, for the word of God, and for the testimony of Iesus Christ, thither banished for the preaching the Word of God, and bearing witness to the Truths of the Gospel of our Lord Jesus.

10. And it came to pass in this Island, that I was in the spirit on the Lords day, actuated and im∣pressed upon in my inward man, my mind being va∣cant from this earthly body, and external senses, and wholly seised by this Divine and Angelical Power, which caused in it the following Visions, and Pro∣phetical Impressions, but as lively and clear as any objects to the outward or corporeal senses: And when I was thus in the Spirit, and had as it were left the body in this ecstasie, I heard behind me a great voice as of a Trumpet;

11. Saying, I am Alpha and Omega, the first and the last, and shall declare unto thee such things as concern the Church continuedly, from the first be∣ginning thereof to the end of the world. And what therefore thou seest write in a Book, and send it unto the Seven Churches which are in Asia, unto Ephesus, and unto Smyrna, and unto Perga∣mus, and unto Thyatira, and unto Sardis and Philadelphia, and unto Laodicea; that is to say, send it to the truly Catholick and Apostolick Church dispread upon the * 1.1 face of the Earth, and divided into seven successions, unto the Ephesine succession, and unto the Smyrnean succession, and unto the Per∣gamenian succession, and unto the Thyatirian succes∣sion, and unto the Sardian succession, and unto the Philadelphian succession, and unto the Laodicean suc∣cession: Which seven successions one after another fill up the whole time of the Church Universal, from the beginning thereof to the end of the world.

12. And I turned to see the voice that spake with me, to see who it was that spake thus to me: And being turned, I saw seven golden Candle-sticks.

13. And in the midst of the seven golden Can∣dlesticks, one like unto the Son of Man; the Re∣presentation, namely, of Christ, as he is also one with his Church. For we are Members of his Body, of his Flesh, and of his Bones; They two shall be one flesh:* 1.2 This is a great Mystery, saith the Apostle, but I speak of Christ and his Church. Cloathed with a garment down to the foot, and girt about the pops with a golden girdle, in token that he is our High Priest, this habit alluding to the High Priests Vestments.

14. His head and his hairs were white like wool, as white as snow, for the greater venerable∣ness of this High Priests person, and in token he is that Christ that the Prophet calls Councellour, the Mighty God, the Everlasting Father: For these are the symbols of his Wisdom, and Paternal Authority. And his eyes were as a flame of fire, to signifie the penetrancy of his Providence, and spirit of dis∣cerning both in himself, and in his Church.

15. And his feet like unto fine brass, as if they burned in a furnace; which shews the stability and purity of his wayes in himself, and the constancy of his Church in the furnace of affliction and fiery try∣als: And his voice as the sound of many waters: Which plainly discovers that Christ is here represent∣ed in union with his Church; Waters signifying a Multitude in the prophetick stile, as most certainly they do.

16. And he had in his right hand seven stars:

The seven stars according to his own Interpretation are the seven Angels of the seven successions of the Church, whom he bears up, sustains, and strengthens throughout all Ages. And out of his mouth went a hard two-edged sword; a Symbol of Christ as he is the Living Word of God quick and powerfull, and sharper than any two-edged sword. And denotes also the powerfull Word of the Gospel preached by the Living Members of his Church. And his coun∣tenance was as the Sun that shineth in his strength. This is spoke in reference to him as he is called the Sun of Righteousness, or in reference to the Church in the state of the New Jerusalem; of which it is said, There shall be no night there, and they need no candle, nor the light of the Sun: For the Lord God giveth them light, and they shall reign for ever and ever.

17. And when I saw him I fell at his feet as dead, as being exceedingly afraid that this fight might portend some great evil to the people of God. And he laid his right hand upon me, saying unto me, Fear not, I am the First and the Last: And though there may be some great Afflictions and Try∣als of my Church represented to thee in what thou seest; yet thou must remember, nothing shall come to pass without my Providence, who am the First and the Last, and will carry you through all Perse∣cutions and Deaths, and make you at length more than Conquerours.

18. I am he that liveth and was dead, and be∣hold I am alive for evermore, Amen, and have the Keys of Hell and of Death; as if he should say, For I am now alive, though I was my self dead once and crucified, but behold I am alive for Ever. Amen.

This is most certainly true of him whom this Vision represents, and that he has the Keys of Hell and Death. And therefore no man need fear to undergo martyr∣dom for his Cause, who will certainly make him par∣taker of a Blessed Immortality, and plunge his bar∣barous persecutors into everlasting perdition. Where∣fore after this encouragement to Iohn, he sayes,

19. Write the things which thou hast seen, and the things which are, and the things which shall be hereafter; that is, write the things which thou hast seen and known already as being past, and the things that are present, and the things that are to come after, (viz.) The affairs of the first succession of the Church, which is the Ephesine succession; the affairs of the present succession of the Church (in which S^t Iohn wrote these Visions) which is the Smyr∣nean; and of the rest of the successions of the Church which are to come afterwards.

20. Which affairs thus distributed into seven suc∣cessions, or intervals, are indeed, the mystery of the seven stars which thou sawest in my right hand, and the seven golden candlesticks: For, the seven stars are the Angels of the seven Churches, that is, the seven successions of Bishops and Pastors that are to shine forth in the brightness and purity of their Life and Doctrine in the seven successions of the Churches: And the seven candlesticks which thou sawest are the seven successions of the Apostolick Church, here called seven Churches.

NOTES. CHAPTER I. Vers. 1.

Manifestly shewn already by him, or that are past, &c. This is spoken in reference to the absurd Interpreta∣tions of Grotius, in the first six Seals, and the first six Trumpets, who fixes the Scene of all those Visions in Ju∣dea, and ends them with the sacking of the City: which was before S^t John wrote the Apocalypse, for he wrote it in Domitian's time. But what will not prejudiced Wits imagine, rather than stoop to the Truth? See my Myste∣ry of Godliness, Book 5. chap. 16. And Synops. Pro∣phetic. Book 2. chap. 2. sect. 4, 5, &c.

Vers. 4. Truly Catholick and Apostolick Church, &c. This I conceive to be comprehended in the name Asia, in allusion to the Hebrew word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Asia, sig∣nifying Fundamentum; as if he should say, To all the Churches that keep the Apostolical Foundation in Do∣ctrine and Practice, that keep in it, and swerve not from it by admitting any thing contrary thereto.

And dispersed on the face of the earth, &c. This also is comprised in the word Asia, by allusion to another Hebrew word of a like nearness of sound 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is Asia again, and is the lowest of those four Worlds noto∣riously known amongst the Cabbalists, Aziluth, Briah, Jetzirah, Asia, of which last the lowest part is this Earth we tread upon: So evidently is the allusion to the nearness of sound in words made use of in this Book of the Apocalypse. See another reason from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 in my Exposition of the seven Churches.

Vers. 19. The affairs of the first succession of the Church, which is the Ephesine succession; the affairs of

the present, &c. That the affairs of the Ephesine suc∣cession were past when S^t John received those Visions in Patmos is plain from hence; because he received them about the end of Domitians Reign: But the begin∣ning of the Smyrnean succession is in the tenth of Nero, or not long before: which is about thirty years before S^t John received the Visions in Patmos. Besides that the Ephesine succession is described amongst other cha∣racters, as not yet being stained with the doctrine and deeds of the Nicolaitans: But the Nicolaitans appear∣ed in the twelfth year of Nero, as you may see in Span∣danus the Epitomizer of Baronius: Therefore the Ephe∣sine succession was to expire before that time. So plain is it that it was past when S^t John was in Patmos.

But hence emerges a difficulty that well may stumble some, (viz.) Being the Ephesine succession was then past, why should there be an Epistle directed to it, which is as if one should write to the deceased? To which I an∣swer, That this Book of Prophecies being designed a Re∣presentation of the State of the Church, or of the Em∣pire in reference to the Church, from the very beginning of the Church (that the Representation might be the more compleat by not leaving out that little Time that was then past) to the end of the world, in that way, I say, it is comprized, whether Epistolar or other, it is to be begun and continued throughout: And therefore in the Prophetical Vision of the Seals; as the first Seal is rather an History than a Prophecy, though disguised under Prophetick Iconismes (For the time of the thing signified there by the Rider of the White Horse (which the whole stream of Interpreters understand of Christ guiding and assisting the Apostles and his Church in the Apostolick times) was in a manner quite expired when John wrote the Apocalypse:) So this Epistle to the E∣phesine

succession of the Church, is to be conceived an Historical Description of that State of the Church, ra∣ther than an Epistle, though for conformity-sake it is put into this Epistolar disguise.

And since it is not so proper to write Epistles to any but those who are in present Being; surely they who are satisfied there is no absurdity in writing in this Episto∣lar way to the successions of the Church not yet come, ought to think the using this Epistolar form to a succes∣sion already past, the more tolerable.

But supposing the Apocalypse a designed Representati∣on, as I hinted above, of the affairs or state of the Church set out by a triple Prophecy, this of the Seven Churches, the second of the Sealed Book, and the last of the Open∣ed Book, and that the Prophecy of the Sealed Book, and of the Opened Book, each of them, though in a Prophetick stile, yet in the entrance of the Prophecies represent Things or Times partly past and partly pre∣sent (neither of which are the proper objects of Prophecy) when S^t John was in Patmos, and therefore so far are rather an History than Prophecy, though disguised or adorned with Prophetick Iconismes, and consequently that that little snip of time, the Ephesine Interval con∣tains, though an History rather than an Epistle, may as well be set down in an Epistolar form, as the other in a Prophetical: These things, I say, being considered, the using this form of an Epistle to the Ephesine succes∣sion, that it might keep conformity with the rest (the usefulness of which Epistolar forms I have declared in my * 1.3 Prophetical Exposition of the Seven Churches) is not only tolerable but very fit and commendable.

And yet this is not all that I have to say: For being there was a Real Church in Ephesus in S^t John's time, which according to the literal sense of these Epistles

might be concerned therein, and that there is also a Mo∣ral use and sense of them, according to which they may be applicable to this or that state of any particular Church of Christ, in any particular Place or Age of the World (so richly usefull is the contrivance of this holy writing for the edification of the Church of Christ, though the main be the Prophetical design, as to the illustration and Confirmation of his Providence over his Church, and that the Vision of the Seven Churches is a Prophecy properly so called, I have by no less than twenty Arguments con∣firmed in my * 1.4 Exposition of the Seven Churches) this Epistolar Form, I say, to the Ephesine succession is not only tolerable, fit, and commendable, but altogether ne∣cessary. Which things, though I have sufficiently noted and confirmed in my said Exposition of the Seven Churches, yet I thought fit to give an hint of them here, that no man unawares may stumble, as is said, at the very threshold.

CHAPTER II.

1. UNto the Angel of the Church of Ephesus write; that is, to the Bishops and Pastors, &c. of the Ephesine succession of the Church (which begins with the beginning of the Church of Christ, and ends in the tenth year of Nero) * whose name bears with it the signification of its condition. These things saith he that holdeth the seven stars in his right hand, and walketh in the midst of the seven golden candlesticks. And he salutes you under the Title of this part of his former Representation, that you may run the race more chearfully that now is begun, he going along with you, even to the end

thereof. He supports, comforts and guides all the se∣ven successions of the Bishops and Pastors of the Church that labour in the Word and Doctrine, and is in the midst of all the seven successions of the Church throughout all Ages, minding their Conver∣sation, and assisting them that are true of heart even to the end of the world.

2. I know thy works, thy labour, and thy pa∣tience, and how thou canst not bear them which are evil. I know your works, and approve of your labour, industry and patience, and commend you for that loathing and detestation you have of lewd and wicked men. And thou hast tryed them that say they are Apostles and are not, and hast found them lyars. That also I commend, that you can sift and try such as pretend to be sent from me, and to be Apostles, and are not, but are Lyars and Deceivers, mere Impostors and Counterfeits.

3. And hast born, and hast patience, and for my names sake hast laboured, and hast not fainted. I commend you for this your first great fervency and desire of enlarging my Church or Kingdom, and bearing patiently all crosses and difficulties you meet with in the carrying on the work, and for your not fainting under so great pains and travail.

4. Nevertheless I have somewhat against thée, because thou hast left thy first Love. There is not that earnestness of affection for me as at the first, nor fervency and zeal for the enlargement of my King∣dom, but you are more cold and remiss.

5. Remember therefore from whence thou art fallen, and repent, and do the first works, that is, act with that constancy, fervency and sincerity you did before. Or else I will come unto thee quickly

and will remove thy candlestick out of his place, except thou repent; that is, I will raise such a tem∣pest of Persecution against the Church, that she will not be able to keep her place but be shaken and dri∣ven with the violence thereof. This you must expect unless you repent.

6. But this thou hast, that thou hatest the déeds of the Nicolaitans, which I also hate. This was yet the priviledge of this Ephesine Interval of the Church, that she was not then tainted with the lusts of that filthy Sect of the Nicolaitans, which the soul of Christ so abhors.

7. He that hath an ear let him hear what the spirit saith unto the Churches in these Prophetical Parables. For it is of great concern and edification for them to consider and understand them through all the successions of the Churches, that what is re∣commended they may follow and eschew the contra∣ry at all times. To him that overcometh will I give to eat of the Tree of Life which is in the midst of the paradise of God; that is, he that over∣cometh through his much labour and pains, he shall be refreshed with the food of the Tree of Life, and for his patience and sufferings enjoy a Paradise of pleasure in Heaven.

8. And unto the Angel of the Church of Smyr∣na write: To the Bishops and Pastors, &c. of the Smyrnean succession of the Church (which reaches from the end of the Ephesine succession to about the three hundred twenty fourth year of Christ, * and bears the signification of its condition in its name) write to them thus: These things saith the first and the last, which was dead and is alive. Who sa∣lutes you therefore with this part of his former Re∣presentation

as his most proper Title here, for an en∣couragement in the bloody persecuting times you are in: For if you dye Martyrs, you shall as assuredly be alive again as I am that was once Martyred and Crucified. And I am the First and the Last, and will make my Church hold out to the End, and stand Conquerour in the Field.

9. I know thy works, and tribulation, and po∣verty, but thou art rich. I know how you are de∣stitute of all the comforts of life, and conflict with the greatest necessities, but yet ye are really rich, full of Christian patience and meekness, and of invincible courage amidst all the dangers of death. And I know the blasphemie of them that say they are Iews and are not, but are the Synagogue of Satan. That say they are Christians and are not; (for so Iews sig∣nifies in the Apocalyptick stile) and so by their da∣stardliness and perfidiousness blaspheme and dishonour that Noble Name and Calling, by proving themselves of the Synagogue of Satan, and betrayers of the King∣dom of their Lord that bought them, fast slaves to the flesh, and impatient of all persecution, worse than Peter, whom notwithstanding when he would have discouraged me from my sufferings on the Cross, I sharply rebuked with a Get thee behind me Satan,* 1.5 for thou savourest not the things of God.

10. Fear none of those things which thou shalt suffer, nor imitate that base cowardise of that Syna∣gogue of Satan, for they are no Church of mine, but a cage of perfidious hypocrites. Behold the Devil shall cast some of you into prison that ye may be tryed, and ye shall have tribulation ten dayes. The Devil and his Ministers under Paganism will cast some of you into prison for the tryal of your faith

and constancy; and you shall have the tribulation of ten dayes, even of those ten bloody persecutions under the Pagan Emperours. Be thou faithful unto death, and I will give thee a Crown of Life: Be in no wise discouraged, but continue faithful unto death, and I will give you a Crown of Life, even the Imperial Crown, Constantine turning Christian, which will be a Crown of Life and security to you my Church, and save you from death and persecution: This shall be the external effect and fruit of your suf∣ferings, or the Political reward thereof.

11. He that hath an ear let him hear what the spirit saith unto the Churches. He that overcom∣eth shall not be hurt of the second death. He that stands out this tryal, and valiantly suffers martyrdom shall not be hurt of the second death, but have his part in the first resurrection accordingly as it is writ∣ten, Apoc. 20.6. Blessed and holy is he that has part in the first resurrection, on such the second death hath no power. This is the promised priviledge of those Mar∣tyrs that suffered persecution in this Smyrnean succes∣sion of the Church under the Ten hot Persecutions. And as that other promise that preceded the Parabo∣lical Epiphonema was external and political: So this reward that follows the said Epiphonema is invisible, and belonging to the other State: which distinction is to be observed in the rest of the Epistles; and that the promise that follows the Epiphonema, He that hath ears let him hear, &c. belongs to what is spiri∣tual and invisible.

12. And to the Angel of the Church in Perga∣mus write, (viz.) to the Bishops and Pastors, &c. of the Pergamenian succession of the Church (which reaches from the end of the Smyrnean succession, name∣ly

from the year three hundred twenty four, to the year one thousand two hundred forty two, when the Popes Legate Ameline with Trancavel the Bastard Son of Count Beziers ended the War against the Albigen∣ses, * and which has its condition signified by its name) write thus: These things saith he which hath the sharp sword with two edges. Who sa∣lutes them wearing the Title of this part of his Re∣presentation by a kind of Antithesis, this Sword that comes out of his mouth being the Sword of the Spi∣rit, in opposition to the Sword and Arm of Flesh, that persecuted the True Church in this succession.

13. I know thy works, and where thou dwel∣lest, even where Satans seat is; and thou hold∣est fast my Name, and hast not denyed my Faith: I observe how well thou carryest thy self, though thou dwellest under the Dominion and Jurisdiction of the first-born of Lucifer, that man of Sin, and Son of Pride, a right Pergamenian, lofty and haughty, under whose Jurisdiction notwithstanding thou art found to dwell, and yet holdest fast to my Authority, and the pure Christian Profession, nor hast apostatised from the Ancient Faith and Purity of Worship, un∣tainted with Superstition and Idolatry: Even in those days wherein Antipas was my faithful mar∣tyr, who was slain among you where Satan dwel∣leth: No not in those dayes when Antipas, those faithfull and couragious Opposers of Holy Father, the Pope (for so the word plainly signifies) the Waldenses and Albigenses were cruelly slain with the Sword with∣in the Jurisdiction of that first-born of Lucifer.

14. But I have a few things against thée, be∣cause thou hast there them that hold the Doctrine of Balaam, who taught Balac to cast a stum∣bling-block

before the children of Israel, to eat things sacrificed to Idols, and to commit fornica∣tion. You have those that comply with the Pseudo-prophet Balaam, the lofty Lord of the People, for so Balaam signifies, who has taught Balac the Secular Power, now but a shadow or cypher, it being in this Interval, evacuate in a manner (as the name imports) by the over-topping of the Power Ecclesiastical, to force the Israelites, that is, the true and genuine Chri∣stians (of which the Israelites were a type) to come to Mass, and by partaking thereof to partake of Ido∣latry, they making by their Idolatrous usages there, the Lords Supper, which is a Feast upon a Sacrifice, like to the feeding upon Idolothyta, upon things sacri∣ficed unto Idols.

15. So hast thou also them that hold the Do∣ctrine of the Nicolaitans, which thing I hate. And besides these complyers with the Mass, though they be in their own judgements against it, there are amongst you also that indulge too much to the liber∣ty of the flesh, and imitate the Sect of the Nicolai∣tans, a thing which my soul abhors.

16. Repent, or else I will come unto thée quick∣ly; amend these faults, or else I will come unto you quickly by a more strict vigilaney of the Lords of the Inquisition (whose Rule was most notorious in the succeeding Interval of the Church) and then the more frequent terrour of being burnt at the stake will more effectually extinguish the flames of your wan∣tonness and lust: Be ye therefore pure and holy as I also am pure and holy. And will fight against them with the sword of my mouth. And as for those that opress my faithfull ones, I will fight against them with the sword of my mouth, and cut off whole

Nations by vertue thereof, (namely of the sword of the Spirit, which is the word of God convincingly preached) from the Idolatrous Roman Church. This is a reward political and visible to be fulfilled in the next Interval at the close thereof.

17. He that hath an ear let him hear what the spirit saith unto the Churches. To him that o∣vercometh will I give to eat of the hidden manna. He that stands out in purity of heart and a good con∣science, he instead of that sweet consecrated wafer, that pretended visible Manna, shall eat of the true hidden spiritual Manna, spoken of Iohn 6. My flesh is meat indeed, and my blood is drink indeed: For the words I there speak, they are spirit and they are life. And if he dye he shall eat Angels food, and pass unto their Communion and Society. And will give him a white stone, and in the stone a new Name written, which no man knoweth saving he that receiveth it; that is, though he be accused and condemned for an Heretick by this lofty Roman or Pergamenian Church where Satan the Accuser dwells, yet I will give him a white Stone, and ab∣solve him in Foro Divino. Or I will give him the white Stone in which a New Name is written, that is to say, I will confirm and establish him in the new Birth, and give to him that pure and permanent in∣estimable Pearl of the Divine Nature, which none knows but he that has it. And thus he shall be a∣bundantly compensated for all the evil, or loss he may seem to sustain by his quitting the Communion of this Idolatrous Church of Pergamus or Rome. For the * signification of their names do very nearly a∣gree.

18. And unto the Angel of the Church of Thy∣atira

write. To the Bishops and Pastors, &c. of the Thyatirian succession of the Church (which begins at the ending of the former succession, and reacheth till the time that whole Nations forsook the Communion of the Church of Rome, * and whose condition is re∣presented in the signification of its name) write thus: These things saith the Son of God, who hath his eyes like unto a flame of fire, and his feet like fine brass. These things saith the Son of God to a people that live amongst those that make the Virgin Mary in as high a way or higher (as to worship) the Daughter of God. But his eyes like a flame of fire denote the penetrancy of his Providence, as also the kindling of his just anger against the fiery persecu∣tions of his servants by Thyatira, the Roman Church again, in this Interval. And that his feet are said to be like to fine brass, if we refer it to him as he is in union with his Church, that supplement is to be re∣membred, As if they burned in a furnace; which is an intimation of the frequent burnings of the Servants of Christ at the stake in this Interval.

19. I know thy works, and charity, and service, and faith, and thy patience, and thy works, and the last to be more than the first; that towards the latter end of this Thyatirian succession they were more and greater than before: Which is a noble te∣stimony to the zeal and sincerity of those that began the Reformation.

20. Notwithstanding I have a few things a∣gainst thee, because thou sufferest that woman Ie∣zebel, the Roman Hierarchy or Priesthood, when now in this Interval things are come to that maturi∣ty, that thou mayest cast her off, and free thy self from this unjust and Idolatrous Yoke: This is spoke

to the Powers and Principalities held under by her. Which calleth her self a Prophetess, but is indeed a Pseudoprophetess, a false teacher and seducer of my Servants, the same with the false Prophet elsewhere mentioned in the Apocalypse: To teach and seduce my servants to commit fornication, and to eat things sacrificed unto Idols. That thou sufferest her to bring them to the Communion of the Mass which she has made so Idolatrous, that my Supper being a Feast upon a Sacrifice, she makes it look al∣together like the eating of things sacrificed unto Idols, and so seduces to spiritual fornication, which is Idola∣try: Wherefore let Iezebel * according to the omen and fate in her name be cast out and reputed as the dung of the earth.

21. And I gave her space to repent of her for∣nication, and she repented not. Since my monition to her by the Waldenses and Albigenses, but she re∣mains still obdurate and impenitent.

22. Behold I will cast her into a bed of lan∣guishment, instead of that large bed of wantonness, in which the Kings of the Earth have so universally committed fornication with her. And them that commit adultery with her into great tribulation, except they repent of their déeds, unless they desist from their usual gross Idolatries so scandalous in the eyes of all sober Christians.

23. And I will kill her Children with death, that is, either by the sword that cometh out of my mouth, I shall make them dead to her by their con∣version to the truth, they being mortified and made dead to all the vain trumperies of that false, deceit∣full, idolatrous Church, or I will kill them by a na∣tural death; namely, their Emissaries and Armies that

may be sent against my True Church. And all the Churches shall know that I am be which search∣eth the reins and hearts: And I will give unto every one of you according to his works. So that all the Christian World shall ring of the Righteous∣ness of my Judgments, who have mine eyes like a bright flame of fire piercing into the reins and hearts of men to discover what they are, that I may give to every one according to his demerits.

24. But unto you I say, and unto the rest in Thyatica, as many as have not this doctrine, nor comply with the Idolatrous Form of the Roman Re∣ligion. And which have not known the depths of Satan, as they speak: Those deep reasons of State as they phrase it; that frame Religion so as if there were no God really, nor Christ that superintends his Church, but that Religion were only to be a trick of State to Rule or Fool the people with: Unto you, I say, that are better minded, I will put upon you no other burthen, I will give you no further trouble.

25. But that which you have already, hold fast till I come. Persist only in the good way you are in, and hold fast to the Truth till I come, and take the Papal Yoke from off your neck.

26. And he that overcometh and kéepeth my words unto the end, to him will I give power over the nations; that is, they that with invincible patience and courage stand out to the last, and keep my works unto the end, remembring to do what I command, that keep faith and good conscience in de∣spite of all the Thyatirian persecutions: These Peo∣ple, with their Princes and Governours shall at the end, namely, in the last Semi-time of the Seven get

the Nations under them, that is, the Paganochristians, nor shall be any longer subject to their Dominion, who had become in a manner Heathens by their Ido∣latrous practices, and barbarous Cruelties.

27. (And he shall rule them with a rod of iron, as the vessels of a potter shall they be broken to shivers; that is, they shall rigidly enough, and se∣verely rule them, so that they shall not be able to whinch but at their own peril, and all their strength shall be broken to fitters as a potters vessel) even as I have received of my Father; that is, so far as I shall have received of my Father, as to the propaga∣ting of my Kingdom at this time, so will I give to them.

28. And I will give him the morning star: Not the Bright Morning Star, which state belongs ra∣ther to the seventh Vial, the commencement of the Philadelphian Interval, or to the Millennial Empire of Christ; but the Morning Star, which shall appear, though not so bright, yet very early or unexpected∣ly, but a little beyond the middle of the seventh Se∣mitime, after the Time and Times are expired.

29. He that hath an ear let him hear what the spirit saith unto the Churches. Nothing follow∣ing this Epiphonema, or rather the promises of re∣ward going before it, it shows plainly, that they be∣long to this Life, and the visible state of the Church on Earth.

NOTES. CHAPTER II. Vers. I.

Whose name bears in it the signification of its con∣dition, &c. And that by an allusion either to 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 and 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the Bar, Lists, or Beginning of a Race; for that this Ephefine Interval is the beginning of the whole decursion and succession of the Church to the end of the world, and the Christian mans life is compared to a race by S^t Paul: Or in allusion to 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which is an earnest desire, suppose, of promoting our own salvati∣on, and propagating the Kingdom of Christ upon Earth, and of winning the Imperial Crown, which he on the White Horse with Bow in his hand aimes at, whose Vi∣sion begins with this Ephesine Interval: For which zea∣lous design this Ephesine Church is commended in the second and third verses of this Chapter: But in the fourth Verse Christ saith, I have somewhat against thee, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because thou hast left thy first Love, re∣mitted it, or slackened it: So that there may be an allusion to 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 in another sense, as it signifies, relaxa∣tion or remisness of Duty, as well as to 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. Both which, one after another was the condition of this Inter∣val of the Church; first earnest zeal and love, after re∣misness and coolness.

Vers. 8. And bears the signification of its conditi∣on in its name, &c. For 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Smyrna is the same that Myrrha, Myrrh, from the Syriac 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, amara. By Smyrna therefore is understood the bitterness of affliction, and persecution in this second Interval of the Church.

Vers. 12. And has its condition signified in its name, &c. For by 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 are signified 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, all

high and lofty structures, though the Towers of Troy were properly at first so called, wherefore this name 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, of the Church in Pergamus, part∣ly denotes the exaltation of the Church out of her Smyr∣nean humiliation and affliction, and partly the excessive pride and fastuosity of the Idolatrous Hierarchy growing up to the top in this Interval. In which Pergamus not∣withstanding, or proud Luciferian Church, the true Apo∣stolick Church was fain to have its abode, being the Wo∣man in the Wilderness, as she is set out in other Visi∣ons.

Vers. 17. Signification of their names do very near∣ly agree, &c. Pergamus signifying, as was observed a∣bove, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, all lofty and stately Structures, and Rome having its name from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 exaltari, as some Criticks are pleased to observe.

Vers. 18. And whose condition is represented in the signification of the name, &c. For it is 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the Church in Thyatira: which either alludes to 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, by reason of the effeminacy of the Church of Rome at that time, and her worship∣ping the Virgin Mary as the Daughter of God in the highest sense (for Thyatira signifies Daughter, from whence this City had its denomination) more by far than the Son of God himself: Or else it alludes to 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Altars of Burnt Offerings, the burnings of the Martyrs of Iesus for their testimony against the foul corruptions, and gross Idolatries of the Church of Rome, being more than ordinarily frequent in that Interval: For either of these reasons, or rather for them both, is this succession of the Church, called the Church in Thyatira.

Vers. 20. According to the omen and fate in her name, &c. For 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 may be derived from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 which signifies, either Habitaculum or Stercus, and from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉

or, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which considered together will signifie her casting out of her habitation, and the loathing of her, as the dung of the Earth. See my Exposition of the Seven Churches, Chap. 6.

CHAPTER III.

1. ANd unto the Angel of the Church in Sar∣dis write: To the Bishops and Pastors espe∣cially, (and those committed to their charge) of the Sardinian succession (which begins where the Thya∣tirian succession ends; that is, when Protestantisme had become the Religion of Nations and Kingdoms, and reaches to the last Vial, Apoc. 16. * whose con∣dition is notified in their name) write thus: These things saith he that hath the seven Spirits of God and the seven Stars; that has in his power and disposal all the Divine Graces, and heavenly hosts or companies of Angels for the assistance of his Church, and all the Bishops and Pastors thereof, which are here typified by the seven Stars; as by having them in his hand, that they are under his power and pro∣tection; a description of Christ, like that in the Epi∣stle to the Ephesine Church. Which description is here repeated for the encouragement of Renewing his Church again, and the Reforming it into the Anci∣ent Apostolick Faith and Practice. As if it were the very beginning and emerging again of the truly A∣postolick Church that had lien hid in the wilderness of Paganochristian Romanism. Which through these helps, though it began hopefully and commendably, yet was never at any great pitch of perfection, and has also degenerated from what she at first appeared.

Of which Christ complains, saying, I know thy works, that thou hast a name that thou livest and art dead. I observe how mean and wretched thou art in comparison of what thou oughtest to be, and that thou hast a name that thou livest, as being so full of zeal for or against this Ceremony, and that O∣pinion, with hot and nice disputes about Faith and Justification; but I will assure thee, be thou as full of life and activity as thou wilt about such things, if thou hast not that Faith which worketh by Love, thou art nothing in my esteem. Whosoever is devoid of a due degree of charity, and unself-interessed love, let him be reputed to live as much as he will, he is accounted dead in my sight.

2. Be watchfull: Keep a guard over thine own heart, and breath after unfeigned charity, which is the bond of perfection, and will prevent all Schisms and Factions, and tye the Members of Reformed Christendom in one heart and one mind to their Go∣vernours Temporal and Spiritual, and to one another. And strengthen the things which remain that are ready to dye. Revive and corroborate in you the things that remain, (viz.) Faith in God, and in the Lord Jesus Christ, and of a blessed Immortality after this life; these you yet profess, though Infidelity and Atheism, with Sensuality and Libertinism have grown much upon you, so that the belief even of these ne∣cessary things are ready to dye also. For I have not found thy works perfect before God. For you do not go on towards perfection, nor are ye in a grow∣ing state, though ye have not yet reached your due stature approvable before God, which is a sign you are in a state of languishment and vergency towards death.

3. Remember therefore how thou hast received and heard, and hold fast and repent: Since you profess your selves reformed into a true Apostolick Church, remember what you have heard out of the Apostles writings. How that I so loved my Church that I gave my self for it, that I might sanctifie it, that I might make it a glorious Church, having neither spot nor wrinkle, nor any such thing, but that it should be holy and without blemish. And let not the vain glosses of any faint-hearted hypocrites deceive or discourage you. Remember also what ye heard of Antichrist, That man of sin, that exalts himself above all that is called God and worshipped, and for ever abandon that wicked and Idolatrous Communion. And take heed of that nauseous and detestable ingratitude of not setting a due value of my redeeming you from that worse than Aegyptian or Babylonian Captivity into the Gospel-liberty: And be not imposed upon by the fine words and subtil sophistry of either known enemies, or perfidious brethren. These and such like things as these taught by my Apostles, and repeated again by the first Reformers, be sure to hold fast, and repent of your slipperiness and remisness, of your easiness and inclinableness again to the flesh-pots of Aegypt, the carnal entertainments under that mystical Pharaoh at Rome. If therefore thou shalt not watch I will come on thée as a thief, and thou shalt not know what hour I will come upon thee. These things therefore I strictly command thee and charge thee to do, which if thou wilt not carefully and di∣ligently observe, and have a due watch over thy wayes, I will come on thee of a sudden, and sur∣prize thee with some terrible judgement for thy gross ingratitude, and thou shalt not know what hour I

come upon thee before the storm certainly overtake thee. God make the Reformed Churches sensible of this sad commination, which is foretold them for no other purpose, than that by their timely repentance, and carefull watchfulness they may avoid it.

4. Thou hast a few names even in Sardis, which have not defiled their garments, and they shall walk with me in white, for they are worthy. There be some few excellent persons, and of a true Christian Spirit scattered up and down in the Re∣formed Churches, (though the generality be so bad and imperfect) who have not defiled their Garments, the inward nor outward cloathing of their Soul, nor spotted the decency of their conversation by any scan∣dal of the flesh. With these innocent and spotless souls not soiled or stained with the filth of the usual tinctures of the flesh, will I converse by my spirit, whereby they shall be able to walk with me with all innocency and integrity of heart for ever: For they are persons meet and fit for such converse.

5. He that overcometh, the same shall be cloath∣ed in white raiment: They that overcome all dif∣ficulties inward and outward, and persist in purity and true holiness, they shall be cloathed in white ray∣ment, that is, they shall be successfull and prosperous in the affairs of my Kingdom, which they endeavour to propagate. And I will not blot out his name out of the Book of Life: that is, this sort of men shall continue to the Philadelphian succession, and on∣wards to the end of the world. And this Book of Life to them shall be as the Crown of Life to the Smyr∣nean succession, shall be their security from persecu∣tion and death. That Church which they introduce into the world, which is the Philadelphian, shall ne∣ver

be brought again under the Subjection, Tyranny and Persecution of any Power whatsoever. But I will confess his Name before my Father, and be∣fore his Angels. I will in a special manner recom∣mend them to the good Providence of God, and the watchful Ministry of his holy Angels.

6. He that hath an ear let him hear what the Spirit saith unto the Churches. The Reformed Churches, especially let them take particular notice what the Holy Ghost has here delivered. That Christ who holds the seven Stars in his right hand, and ap∣pears thus to the Reformed Churches, as he did to the Ephesine or first Apostolick Church, is as ready and serious in the renewing, and the reforming of his Church as he was then in setting it on foot first in the world. And he appears, as then walking in the midst of the Golden Candlesticks; (which signifies his helpfull presence to his Church) so here with the succour of his Divine Graces, and Ministry, and assi∣stance of his holy Angels: So that nothing is wanting to rouse us effectually out of this carnal drousiness toward the attainment of the dispensation of the Spi∣rit and Power, except our own sincerity and diligent attention to, and firm belief of the Oracles of God: So that the main success of things hitherto, as to the effect of Religion in the Reformed Churches, lies at our own doors: God give us grace to consider it.

7. And to the Angel of the Church in Philadel∣phia write: To the Bishops and Pastors especially (but together with their Charge) of the Philadel∣phian succession, (which begins where the Sardian ends and reaches to the fourth Thunder, * and dis∣covers its nature and condition in its name) write thus: These things saith he that is holy, and

speaks to a Church that willingly listens to such mo∣nitions as these: Be ye holy for I am holy, and, Be ye perfect as your Father which is in heaven is perfect. He that is true: And will verifie all his glorious pro∣mises in the Philadelphian succession, or blessed Mil∣lennium to all those that trust in his Word. He that has the key of David: He that is the Chief Minister of State to the Eternal God, * whom the Apostle Iohn calls LOVE. He that openeth and no man shutteth, and shutteth and no man openeth: He that when he will can open the door of success to his own, and shut it again when he will against his Ene∣mies, and so administer all things prosperously.

8. I know thy works and designs, and highly ap∣prove of them; I know thou doest nothing out of bitter zeal, faction, or self-seeking, nothing out of vain-glory, or any other worldly end, but simply out of love of Me, and of my Righteousness, and out of love to all Mankind, for the promoting of whose both present and future happiness thou dost all thy endea∣vours; and therefore, Behold I have set before thée an open door and no man can shut it, against thee: For thou hast a little strength, and hast kept my Word, and hast not denyed my Name: Though thou hadst but a little Force or Army in comparison of the rest of the world, yet thou hast been valiant, and stood for my Word stoutly and couragiously a∣gainst all gainsayers, and hast never behaved thy self otherwise than becomes a sound and faithfull Chri∣stian, and such as is resolved never to dishonour that Profession or Name.

9. Behold I will make them of the Synagogue of Satan (which say they are Iews and are not, but do lye:) Behold I will make them that are the

Synagogue of the Devil, for their pride, falsities, and murderous cruelties, and yet call themselves Iews, that is, Christians [nay, Holy Church] (the Type as above being used for the Antitype) but are so far from being so, that really they are but Pseudochri∣stians, or rather the Synagogue of Antichrist, who under pretence of professing Christ do most wicked∣ly oppose him, by nulling his Laws, and barbarously murthering his true and faithfull Subjects for not com∣mitting Idolatry, and other abominations they would force upon them: whereby it is manifest, though they call themselves Holy Church and Christians, they are counterfeits and lyars. Behold I will make them to come and worship before thy féet, and to know that I have loved thée. Behold I will make them to come, instead of kissing the Popes Slipper, to worship before thy feet, to be subjected unto thee, and to do thee homage: And to acknowledge how much I have loved thee, and set thee above all the o∣ther Princes of the Earth.

10. Because thou hast kept the word of my pati∣ence, I also will kéep thée from the hour of tempta∣tion, which shall come upon all the world to try them that dwell upon the Earth: Because thou hast showen all along such invincible meekness and pa∣tience in maintaining my cause, and undaunted faith∣fulness; in that great confusion, commotion and tem∣ptation under the last Vial, which shall come upon all the world to try the Inhabitants of the Earth, I will keep thee and protect thee, and thou shalt be safe and victorious in all.

11. Behold I come quickly: Even in this last Vial, into which thou art already entred. Hold that fast which thou hast, that no man take thy Crown.

Thou art a Church after my own hearts desire, O Philadelphia, nor do I accuse thee of any thing, thou carriest thy self with that integrity and sincerity, on∣ly hold fast to that perfection thou hast attained, that thou mayst not be deprived of the Crown I intend for thee: For in thee shall be accomplished all the glorious Promises concerning my Kingdome upon Earth.

12. Him that overcometh will I make a pillar in the Temple of my God, and he shall go no more out. To you that overcome, to you it shall be given to be Pillars in the Temple of my God, you shall be an holy, fixt and stable People, the true, holy Catholick Church that shall never fail, but shall en∣dure till I come in the clouds to judgement at the last day. All other forms and denominations shall perish, but this shall obtain the Dominion unto the end. And I will write upon him the name of my God, and the name of the City of my God, which is New Ierusalem, which cometh down out of Heaven from my God, and I will write upon him my new Name. And on these lasting Pillars shall the Name of my God be written, and the new Na∣ture in you shall be visible and legible, as it were, to all, how heavenly it is and Divine, and how you are really that Church represented by the City in Eze∣chiel, which is called Iehovah Shammah, God is there. For your conversation will be such, that every man will be ready to say, God is amongst you of a truth, and that you are really, as well as called the New Ie∣rusalem, which cometh down out of Heaven from my God. And lastly, I will write upon you my New Name, not the Morning Star, but the Bright Morn∣ing Star, or that newly purchased Title in the Battle,

where the Beast and False Prophet are taken and cast into a lake burning with brimstone, and the rest slain with the sword of him that sate on the White Horse, which sword cometh out of his mouth, (viz.) the Title of King of Kings, and Lord of Lords: For it is then that you shall be the greatest Empire upon Earth.

13. He that hath an ear let him hear what the Spirit saith unto the Churches.

14. And unto the Angel of the Church in Lao∣dicea write: Unto the Bishops and Pastors especi∣ally, and the charge under them in the Laodicean suc∣cession (which reaches from the fourth Thunder till Christ visibly appear in the clouds of Heaven, * and whose name denotes the nature thereof) write thus: These things saith the Amen, the faithfull and true witness; in whom all the Promises are Yea and Amen. Whose faithfulness is seen in bringing to pass the Philadelphian Estate, that marvellous purity and external prosperity of that succession of the Church, and therefore we are to believe his Promises of the Eternal Felicity he reminds us of in this: A Blessed Immortality after this Life, and his visible coming to judge the quick and the dead, and his putting an end to this Terrestrial Scene, though in this declining Age of the Church in the Laodicean suc∣cession some may be too slow to believe it: And therefore these Titles of assuredness and veracity are here used. And he is called a Faithful Witness also, because he so impartially witnesses of the State of the Laodiceans, and does not flatter them. The begin∣ning of the Creation of God. It may be well un∣derstood of the New Creation, or Constitution of things under the Gospel; which he having carried

on all along hitherto according to Prophecy and Pre∣diction, he is the more certainly and readily to be believed in this last Catastrophe of things: Or taking the beginning of the Creation of God, with an higher reference to that Title of his 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which respects his Divinity, or the Eternal Logos, without whom no∣thing was made or created; Then the importance of of it is this, That as sure as he made this Earth, this habitable round world, so we may be as sure that he both can by the same power, and also will destroy it again in this Laodicean succession by a final Confla∣gration, taking vengeance of the wicked, and reset∣ling all true Believers in an Eternal State of Glory.

15. I know thy works, that thou art neither cold nor hot: But that you are careless, formal, luke∣warm Christians. Thou retainest indeed still the ex∣ternal form of the Philadelphian Church, as to Do∣ctrine and Worship; but thou art destitute of that Spirit of Life in the New Birth, which was the pro∣per character of thy deceased Sister Philadelphia. I would thou wert cold or hot. For though it be not better in it self to be quite cold, yet it were for thee, that thou mightest the more easily be convinced of thine own wants, and by repentance and mortifica∣tion enter into the state of Regeneration, and be made partaker of my Spirit.

16. So then because thou art lukewarm, and neither cold nor hot, I will spew thée out of my mouth. I will shew how nauseous and loathsome thou art to me in a torrent of Reproof, as a sign of my disgust against thee; and upon thy impenitence at length being weary of thee (as concerning God it is said before his bringing the deluge of water on the Earth, that it repented him that he had made man)

I will spew thee out from my self, who fill all things, and exterminate thee out of Being by a deluge of Fire that shall put an end to this Terrestrial Scene of things, and the Laodicean Church shall be no more.

17. But in the mean time, that I may faithfully admonish thee, Because thou sayest I am rich and increased with goods and have néed of nothing, whilst thou considerest, that Peace and Plenty, that Power and Rule, and security from Enemies which thou enjoyest, and the purity of Doctrine and Wor∣ship free from Superstition and Idolatry, and the a∣bundance of both Natural and Divine Knowledge, and clear understanding of Prophecies, by reason of their completion now, and skilfull Interpretations of thy Predecessors, and Universal Freedom from all persecution; I tell thee, notwithstanding all these thou art mistaken in thy condition. And knowest not that thou art wretched and miserable, and poor, and blind, and naked, in that thou art destitute of the Glories and Treasures of the Inward Man, and art ignorant of the mysteries of Regeneration, and of the Spirit of Life in the New Birth, and art content with a covering, but not of my Spirit, whereby thou dost but add sin to sin.

18. I counsel thée therefore, to buy of me Gold tryed in the fire, that thou mayest be rich. Gold refined in the fire, and so pure, that it is transparent like glass. New Jerusalem Gold, which is the New Nature or Creature, mine own Image: And the price is, thy sincere endeavouring and breathing after that state, that thou mayest possess those durable Riches which shall not be melted, when the Elements shall melt with fervent heat, and the Earth and the works

therein shall be burnt up, namely, at the Conflagra∣tion. And white rayment, that thou mayest be cloathed, and that the shame of thy nakedness do not appear. And buy of me white rayment, that is, groan in thy self, O spiritless Laodicea, and desire to be cloathed with thy Spiritual Tabernacle from Hea∣ven, that being so cloathed thou mayest not be found naked, and that the shame of thy nakedness may not appear at the last day. And anoint thine eyes with eye-salve that thou mayest see. Clear thy judge∣ment and understanding by a diligent purification of thy Soul from all corruptions of flesh and spirit, and perfect holiness in my fear, that thou mayest see, and have a right discerning in all things.

19. As many as I love I rebuke and chasten, be zealous therefore and repent. As many as I love I chasten, and I have a love to thee even for thy out∣ward resemblance of thy deceased Sister Philadelphia, and therefore I chastise thee with sharp reproofs to bring thee to an inward sense of things, and shall fur∣ther afflict thee by outward straits and distress to a∣waken thee. For thine Enemies Gog and Magog by reason of thy remisness in Religion, security and neg∣lect of the Interest of my Kingdom will grow upon thee, and at last encompass the Beloved City. Be zea∣lous therefore, and repent thee of thy dead formali∣ty and remisness in the affairs of my Kingdome, that so thou mayest recover the Philadelphian love and fervency.

20. And do not complain of difficulties; Behold I stand at the door and knock; if any man hear my voice and open the door, I will come in to him and will sup with him, and he with me. I offer my aid unto you, and solicit you ever and anon by

good monitions and suggestions, and if you obey sin∣cerely my dictates and succours of Light and Grace I offer you, and by this your sincerity open me the door, I will sup with you, I will communicate my Nature and Spirit unto you. You shall feed on my flesh which is meat indeed, and drink of my blood which is drink indeed, and that saying shall be full∣filled in you;* 1.6 I in my Father and you in me, and I in you. If any man love me and keep my Word, my Fa∣ther will love him, and will come to him, and abide with him.

21. And that I may the more effectually rouse thee up out of this dead formality and tepidity, out of this dulness and lethargy, I add further, To him that overcometh will I grant to sit with me in my throne, even as I also overcame, and am set down with my Father in his throne. You shall not only enjoy Me and my Father in this life, but if you will stand to the conflict, and so attain to the state of the Spirit of Life and real Regeneration into the Living Image of my self, I will exalt you to the same happi∣ness with my self, your bodies being transformed in∣to the Image of my glorious Body, and so fitted to ascend into the Throne that he has given me, whose Throne is Heaven, as Earth his footstool. Nay, you shall sit with me in my Throne, and judge the Apo∣state Angels at the last day. This is a great and stu∣pendious promise, but you ought to consider, that he has promised it, who is the Amen, the true and faithfull Witness, and the Beginning of the Creation of God, and therefore both will and can bring all his counsels, pur∣poses and promises to pass: Even so. Amen.

22. He that hath an ear let him hear what the Spirit saith unto the Churches.

NOTES. CHAPTER III. Vers. I.

Whose condition is notified in their name, &c. Namely, by way of allusion to the Lapis Sardius, whose vertue is to exhilarate the mind of him that wears it, and make him couragious, and is an Amulet against witchcraft and poyson: Which may intimate the com∣fortable doctrine of Iustification by Faith, and the de∣feating the poyson of that cup of Fornication in the hand of the Whore of Babylon, that the Sardian Church is not infected with that poyson of Idolatry, as being out of the reach of that inchanted Cup of the Whore. Sardis also signifies Canticum Laetitiae, which sutes well with the Ioy of the Reformed Churches at the rising of the Witnesses, signified by those Harpers with the Harps of God in their hand, ch. 15. But being the Sardius Stone is in Hebrew called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Odem, which sounds near to Edom, and by the Latines termed Carnalina, this insinuates the defectuousness of the Sardian Church, and her Carnality in several points of Doctrine and Practice. Concerning which see my Exposition of the seven Churches, Chap. 7.

Vers. 7. And discovers its nature and condition in its name, &c. For 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 is the Love of the Bre∣thren, and indeed consequently the Love of God and all Men, these Vertues are so nearly linked together when they are sincere, and in a due degree. See my Exposition of the Seven Churches, Chap. 8.

The Apostle Iohn calls Love: And so 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 signifies Amor, as also dilectus, amatus, which will answer to the 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 of the Platonists; which is the highest 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 of all.

Vers. 14. And whose name denotes the nature thereof, &c. For Laodicea signifies either the Righte∣ousness of the People, that is, an external popular mode of Righteousness, the inward Life and Spirit decaying; which is too much the state of Laodicea: Or it signifies the judging of the People, because in this Interval of the Church, namely at the end thereof, Christ will come visibly to Judge and Sentence all People to their final doom.

CHAPTER IV.

HItherto reaches the first part of this Book of Prophecies, which has this peculiar and distinct∣ly from the other two that follow, That as they run altogether upon real Symbols or Iconismes, Repre∣sentations or Images of what is foretold taken from Things; this first part did most what run upon Nomi∣nal or Paranomastical Iconismes or Images, consisting in allusion to Words or Names that signified the con∣dition of things foretold, as was obvious to observe in the explication of that first part of this Book. The second part now begins, and that as high, and reaches as far as the first, that is, it reaches from the begin∣ning of the Christian Church to the end of the world. And it is to be observed, that as this former part, the so far extended Prophecy of the Churches, was ushered in by a voice like a Trumpet, and the glorious Re∣presentation of Christ in the midst of the Golden Candlesticks; so here in this sealed Book-Prophecy here is again the voice like a Trumpet, and Christ again represented in a glorious manner, to shew the parity of these two Prophecies, and that they are of the like

concern and extent: Which will appear more plain in the Interpretation, after the Introduction in this Sealed Book-Prophecy, which takes up the fourth and fifth Chapters, is explained.

1. After this I looked and behold a door was opened in Heaven. After this Vision of the Seven Churches was past, and I come to my self again, ha∣ving occasion to look upwards; behold a door seem∣ed to be opened in Heaven: And the first voice which I heard, was as if it were of a Trumpet talking with me. And lo! the first voice which I heard before the Vision of the Seven Churches, as of a Trumpet talking with me, saying, Come up hi∣ther and I will shew thee the things which must be hereafter; that is, the Representations or Prefigu∣rations of those future things.

2. And immediately I was in the spirit, which is a sign he was again come to himself before. And behold a Throne was set in Heaven, and one sat on the Throne. Being thus caught up in Spirit, in this Ecstasie I presently saw a Throne set in Heaven, and one sitting on that Throne with great Majesty.

3. And he that sat was to look upon like a Ia∣sper and a Sardine Stone: A Iasper and Sardine Stone, the one famous for the firmness thereof, de∣noting the strength, or rather the Omnipotency of the Divinity; the other for the red, fiery colour of it, denoting the piercing activity of the Divine Na∣ture: or the colour of Fire is here made choice of, as being the root of Light, to show, that he that sits here on the Throne is God the Father: Which an∣swers to that appearance of Fire in him that sits on the Throne in Ezechiel's Vision, to whom the Rain∣bow belongs: Which is there God the Father, with

which this Vision has no small affinity, as may ap∣pear, because the Rainbow is seen also here about the Throne in sight like an Emerald, that imitates the most pleasing colour of the Rainbow or Halo, as it follows in the Text: And there was a Rainbow round about the Throne in sight much like unto an Emerald.

4. And round about the Throne were four and twenty seats, and upon the seats I saw four and twenty Elders sitting cloathed in white rayment, and they had on their heads Crowns of Gold. Here it also varies from that Vision of Ezechiel, as being framed for a Type of the future State of the Church, when the New Ierusalem descends from Hea∣ven, and the Tabernacle of God is with men: And therefore the four and twenty Elders are here said to sit round about the Throne, as the Priests and Le∣vites were pitched next the Tabernacle: But in that they wear Crowns as well as white Rayment, it im∣plies the sanctity of the Kings in that State of the Church which this Type points at, those renewed A∣postolick Times in the New Ierusalem, when the Con∣version of the Jews will add the Heads of their twelve Tribes to the number of the twelve Apostles, which these twenty four Elders or Princes of Nations may answer to. And in that there is no one besides God and the Lamb here that appears to be Supream over them; it signifies, that in those Times the Popes Pre∣tenses will vanish, and that Kings and Princes then of the Christian Profession will know themselves, and be acknowledged by all to be in all Causes as well Ecclesiastical as Civil within their own Dominions next and immediately under Christ Supream Heads and Governours.

5. And out of the Throne proceeded lightnings and thunderings, and voices: and there were se∣ven Lamps of fire burning before the Throne, which are the seven Spirits of God. There is also mention of Lamps, and Fire, and Lightning, though no Thundring in the Vision of Ezechiel, which is the Representation of the Spiritual Kingdom of Christ, which is here again typified, but as a State to come of the Church here on Earth. And the seven Lamps of Fire are, either * all the ministring Angels, or all the living and quickening Graces of the Spirit of God.

6. And before the Throne there was a sea of glass like unto Crystal. This is not found neither in the Vision of Ezechiel, but is an Emblem also of the Spiritual Kingdom of Christ, it being the pure laver of Regeneration, the being baptized with the Holy Ghost and with Fire, which the seven Lamps also betoken. And in that it is called a sea of glass, it may signifie the pure transparent condition of the Church, which is a multitude [as Sea signifies] the fixed purity thereof being ever penetrated by the pre∣sence of the seven Lamps of Fire, which are the seven Spirits of God. And * in the midst of the Throne, and round about the Throne were four Beasts full of eyes before and behind. These four Beasts full of eyes before and behind have plainly a resemblance of the four Beasts in Ezechiel's Vision, but may here more particularly relate to the four Camps of Israel, which was a Type of the New Israel of God: But in that they are said to be full of eyes before and be∣hind, it implies, they look backward and forward into the Histories of Times past, and unto the Pro∣phecies and Predictions of things to come, for the

better managing the Affairs of Christs Kingdome.

7. And the first Beast was like a Lion, which was the Standard of Iuda, on the East side of the Camp. The second Beast like a Calf, which was the Standard of Ephraim on the West side of the Camp. The third Beast had the face of a man, which was the Standard of Reuben on the South side. And the fourth Beast was like a flying Eagele, which was the Standard of Dan on the North. And note that these four Beasts were thus situated in the Vision of Ezechiel. And that this only is a Type of that Church that shall be, cast thus into four parts, the Spiritual Kingdom of Christ signified in both Vi∣sions.

8. And the four Beasts had each of them six wings about him, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which is but hard sense if 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, as it must, signifie in a circle about him. And therefore Grotius judiciously joyns 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 together: And so the Text runs thus. Had each of them six wings. And they were full of eyes without and within: And they rest not day and night, saying, Holy, holy, holy, Lord God Almigh∣ty which was, and is, and is to come. Now that the four Beasts are said each of them to have six wings, as the Beasts in Ezechiel's Vision also have, undoubt∣edly they have them for that use the Seraphims are said to make of them in the Prophet Esay;* 1.7 With twain to cover their faces, with twain to cover their feet, and with twain to fly: Which implies a Reverence of the Divine Majesty, an activity and readiness in his Ser∣vice, and a carefulness over our Affections, that we walk in clean paths. And whereas they are presently said to be full of eyes without and within, it implies, that with one eye regarding outward objects, and the

other their own nature, and so comparing them to∣gether they will ever behave themselves decorously and becomingly, with due reverence to that which is above them in dignity and excellency, and at a due distance from those things that are unworthy of them and beneath them: And therefore if any such thing be offered them from without as is repugnant to the innate Light and immutable Principles of an Intel∣lectual Creature, their eyes within will easily discern the Proposer to be either a Fool or an Impostor. This is the state even of the whole People of God in those dayes: But as for their Reverence and devotional sense of their Maker and Redeemer it is in a manner perpetual, they rest not day and night saying, Holy, holy, holy, Lord God Almighty, which was, and is, and is to come: who fills all things and times with his Pre∣sence and Providence. And as the People are, so are their Priest-like Princes and Rulers. For it follows immediately in the next Verses:

9. And when those Beasts give glory, and ho∣nour, and thanks to him that sat on the Throne, who liveth for ever and ever,

12. The four and twenty Elders also, Prince and People being of one heart and mind, fall down before him that sat on the Throne, and worship him that liveth for ever and ever, and tast their Crowns before the Throne, in humble acknowledg∣ment from whom and for whom they Reign, even for the manifesting of the Glory, and Honour, and Power of God in the Kingdom of his Saints: And therefore they are introduced, Saying;

11. Thou art worthy, O Lord, to receive Glo∣ry and Honour, and Power, for thou hast Created all things, and for thy pleasure they are and were Created.

NOTES. CHAPTER IV. Vers. 5.

All the Ministring Angels, or all the Living, &c. For Seven we substitute, All, in this place, the Septe∣nary Number with the Cabbalists signifying Universa∣lity, whence of the Pythagoreans it is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. And the full comprehension of the numbers of sundry things in this Book of the Apocalypse is terminated in Seven.

Vers. 6. In the midst of the Throne, and round a∣bout the Throne, &c. The Beasts seem to have been placed to S^t John's sight, so as that one appeared just in the midst before the Throne, and the spectacle being exhibited to him shelvingly, another appeared beyond the Throne in the same line; and two other, the one on this side, and the other on that side in a line, cutting that other in right Angles; so that they at due distances en∣compassed the Throne in a Circle exteriour to the twenty four Elders. And in that they were not only seen, as it were in the middle of the Throne in the sense abovesaid, but on each side also, and so encompassed the Throne pla∣ced in the common sections or conterminations of the four quadrants of the Circle drawn about it, they are said to be not only in the midst of the Throne but about the Throne in a Circle at equal distances: Or else in the midst, that is, within the Circle of the Throne which is thus conceived to be drawn about it, but so near that the Beasts supposed like those in Ezechiel, will have the same faces appear within the verges of the Throne that appear∣ed without, but in opposite places: But then the Elders must be placed in a Circle without the Beasts, which will

make these Priestly Kings, less answer to the Levites. But thereby we are the better assured that they are Kings and not Priests. It's possible both these wayes may be glanced at in the Vision, and that it may reflect both on the Camp of Israel, and Vision of Ezechiel at once.

CHAPTER V.

1. ANd I saw in the right hand of him that sate on the Throne, that is, in the hand of God, a Book written within and on the backside: (viz.) A Book that had a more outward sense in the meer Letter which consists of Representations Sym∣bolical or Hieroglyphical, of Iconismes or Images of things future; and a more inward sense, which is the sense of the future things themselves thus represent∣ed in Symbols or Images; This Book of Prophe∣cies was in the hand of God the Father, in his power to impart it to whom he pleased, as it is intimated in the beginning of the Apocalypse, which is said to be the Revelation of Jesus Christ, but that God gave it unto him: sealed with seven seals: And in that this Book is said to be sealed with seven seals, it shews what a great Arcanum or Secret it was, it being a Representation of a Scene of Affairs reaching from the beginning of the Church to the end of the world.

2. And I saw a strong Angel proclaiming with a loud voice, Who is worthy to open the Book, and to loose the Seats thereof? And that the in∣estimable worth of this Book of Prophecies, which sottish and prophane Spirits so much slight and vili∣fie, and crafty Politicians so much harden themselves against, may appear, here is proclamation made by a

strong Angel with a loud voice, Who is worthy to open? &c. that is, Who is worthy to have so vast a foresight of things communicated to him from God, as to en∣dite such a Book of Prophecies as this?

3. And no man in Heaven nor in Earth, nei∣ther under the Earth was able to open the Book, neither to look thereon. And this proclamation be∣ing made there was none found neither of the Angels in Heaven, or Men upon Earth, or Infernal Spirits un∣der the Earth, who are vulgarly accounted so wise and cunning, and in whom Witches and Wizards so confide for the knowledge of things to come, that were able to open the Book or look thereon, (i. e.) That had so reaching a foresight as to pierce through such a large series of future things as is contained in this Book, which intimates, that nothing but the holy Power of God could be the Author thereof.

4. And I wept much because no man was found worthy to open and to read the Book, neither to look thereon: That is to say, I was sorely grieved that there was none found meet or worthy to have imparted to him so stupendious a faculty of foretel∣ling things to come, in such a manner as they are in this Book: So useful a gift of Prophecy. Where Iohn personates every good Christian that is solicitous for the affairs of the Church, and thoughtfull what will become of her.

5. And one of the Elders saith to me, wéep not. Cease to be so grieved and troubled in spirit. Behold the Lyon of the Tribe of Iuda, the root of David hath prevailed to open the Book, and to loose the seven Seals thereof. Christ hath by his coura∣geously fulfilling the will of his Father obtained this priviledge, That he may open the Book and loose the

Seals thereof; that is, to have so wonderfull a com∣prehension of future things, and piercing foresight by the gift of his Father, as to foresee all that is con∣tained in this Book, and to communicate it to his Church.

6. And I beheld, and lo, in the midst of the Throne and of the four Beasts, and in the midst of the Elders; That is, betwixt God the Father and the Church, stood a Lamb as it had been slain, and with bleeding wounds upon him; the blessed Jesus Mediator betwixt God and Man, as he is here placed betwixt the Throne and the four Beasts: Having seven horns, which are the Emblems of Power, as being he to whom All Power is given in Heaven and in Earth: And seven Eyes: All manner of Wisdom and Counsel, and all the Angels of God at his beck to execute his Counsel and his Will; which is im∣plied in what follows, which are the seven Spirits of God sent forth unto all the Earth.

7. And he came and took the Book out of the right hand of him that sate upon the Throne: That is, it was given to him of his Father to have so vast a foresight of things to come, from the begin∣ning of the Church even to the end of the World, and Power to effect what was foreknown, according to the beginning of this Book of the Apocalypse, The Revelation of Iesus Christ which God gave unto him, &c. which shews, that the whole Book of the Apoca∣lypse, the Epistles to the seven Churches, as well as the Visions that follow, is a Prophetical Revelation of things to come.

8. The consideration of which wonderful Gift and Power signified by this receiving of the Book, being made so exceeding manifest in the times of the Spiritual

Reign of Christ in the New Ierusalem, which Times this pompous Introduction to the Prophecy of the sealed Book does typifie, (For the four and twenty Elders belong to that state of the Church) will raise a wonderful strain of Faith and Devotion in them, and admiration of the stupendious Providence of Christ over his Church, as it is signified by what fol∣lows: And when he had taken the Book, the four Beasts, and four and twenty Elders fell down before the Lamb, having every one of them Harps and golden Uials full of Odours, which are the praises and prayers of the Saints.

9. And they sing a new Song, saying, And then will they sing a new Song, namely, they will then praise their Creator and Redeemer for that new con∣stitution of things in the Reign of the Spirit, (as it is written, Chap. 21. And he that sate upon the Throne said, Behold I make all things new: And he said straight∣way to Iohn, It is done, I am Alpha and Omega, the beginning and the end, I will give him that is a thirst of the fountain of life freely; that is, I will communi∣cate unto him my Spirit here, and make him partaker of Eternal Life hereafter in my heavenly Kingdom) and they will say as follows: Thou, O Christ, wert worthy to take the Book and open the seals there∣of; that is, to have communicated unto thee so vast a comprehension of the futurity of things, as is con∣tained in this Book of Prophecies, and Power to carry on things as they are predicted. For thou wast slain and hast redeemed us to God by thy blood out of every kindred, and tongue, and people, and nati∣on: This is but a just reward of thy endearing suf∣ferings upon the Cross for the salvation of Man∣kind.

10. And hast made us unto our God Kings and Priests, and we shall reign upon Earth. In this blessed Millennium which thou hast long ago shown to thy Church in that admirable Book of Prophecies: which by the Ministry of an Angel thou communica∣test to thy beloved Disciple Iohn.

11. And to show further how holy, heavenly, and Angelical those Times will be, and what an Union and Agreement betwixt the Church of Christ and the Angelical Hosts, it is further added: And I beheld, and I heard the voice of many Angels round a∣bout the Throne, and the Beasts and the Elders; which Beasts and Elders signifie the Church of Christ consisting of men upon the Earth. And the number of them was ten thousand times ten thousand, and thousands of thousands.

12. These innumerable companies of Angels joyn themselves to the Quire of the Church, saying with a loud voice, Worthy is the Lamb that was slain to receive power, and riches, and wisdom, and strength, and honour, and glory, and blessing, as by whom the State of the Church is brought to such a blessed condition upon Earth, according to the pre∣dictions of this Book of Prophecies. Let all there∣fore be ascribed to him.

13. Nay, the completion of this Book of Prophe∣cies in those Times will be such an Universal convi∣ction of the Divinity and Sonship of Christ, that he was really and in truth the foretold Messias, the Be∣ginner and Finisher of the Works of God to his Church, that that will come to pass that follows. And every Creature which is in Heaven and on the Earth, and under the Earth, and such as are in the Sea, and all that are in them heard I say∣ing,

Blessing, Honour, Glory and Power be unto him that sitteth on the Throne, and unto the Lamb for ever and ever. All intelligent Beings and Spirits, whether belonging to Heaven, Earth or Sea, even the Infernal Spirits themselves shall in the inward powers of their minds and consciences be forced to break out and confess upon the completion of this Book of Pro∣phecies, That all Blessing, and Honour, and Glory, and Power is due unto him that sits on the Throne, and unto the Lamb for ever and ever.

14. And the four Beasts said Amen. Unto this the four Beasts, that is, the Church of Christ here upon Earth, we may be sure will say Amen, that is, consent to such a doxologie: And the four and twenty Elders fell down and worshipped him that liveth for ever and ever; that is, All the Kings and Princes of this truly Catholick and Apostolick Church will fall down and worship him that was dead but is now alive, and behold he liveth for ever∣more; that is, they will devotionally adhere to him, serve him and obey him, who according to the pro∣mise made to his Church, has brought things at last to such an Admirable, Heavenly, Holy, Righteous and Peaceful Constitution: So Glorious an Effect will there be of the completion of the Prophecies of this Book, both as to Christ, and also as to his Church: Which shows how detestable the ingratitude is of such either shallow and frivolous, or prophane Spirits, or cunning obdurate Politicians, that phancying it not to sute with their worldly Interest, vilifie and decry it; when as indeed this Book of Prophecies will prove the most effectual instrument in the hand of Providence that may be, for the rooting all Atheism and Infidelity out of the world, and Converting all

the Kingdoms of the Earth to the Faith and Profes∣sion of our Lord Jesus Christ.

CHAPTER VI.

1. HItherto the Introduction to the Prophecies of the Sealed Book, we come now to the Prophecies themselves: And I saw, says Iohn, when the Lamb opened one of the Seals, that is the first Seal: And I heard as it were the noise of thunder, one of the four Beasts; that is, the first of the four Beasts, the Lion, whose place is towards the East, saying, Come and see. Where we may observe how some parts of the Introductory Repre∣sentation are made use of in this following Vision, as some parts of the description of him that was seen a∣mongst the golden Candlesticks are made use of in the Prefaces of the Epistles to the Churches.

2. And I saw and behold a white Horse, and he that sate on him had a Bow. Which Heros on horseback, and on a white Horse signifies a great Commander or Emperour, Righteous, Prosperous and Glorious in his undertaking. And in that he is said to appear upon the first Beast (the Lion placed on the East side) his saying, Come and see, it is a sign that he is an Emperour from the East part of the World, and in a word, it is the Lion of the Tribe of Iuda, that Captain of our Salvation Jesus Christ, who being ascended into Glory was yet present with his Church, affording them all succours to carry on their Spiritual Warfare. And these Gospel-soldiers came from Iudea in the East. And in that he is said to have a Bow, it denotes, that he aimed at something

of no mean importance. And this Heros on Horse∣back with his Bow answers to the Ephesine succession of the Church, whose name imports earnest purpose or desire, but the thing aimed at or designed is spe∣cified in the following words: And a Crown was given unto him; to wit, the right of it, even the Roman Imperial Crown, and this Bow-man hat the mark when the Emperour Constantine turned Chri∣stian. This is also the Crown promised to the Church in the Smyrnean succession: Be thou faithfull unto death, and I will give thee the Crown of Life; the Crown of security from Pagan persecution. And he went forth conquering and to conquer. This Heros on the white Horse went forth conquering and to conquer till he obtained this Crown under the sixth Seal.

3. And when he had opened the second Seal, I heard the second Beast; that is, the Calf or Oxe, say, Come and sée.

4. And there went out another Horse that was red, a colour significant enough of the effusion of blood, as the Oxe also of the great slaughter, that was to be under this Seal, and what follows, plainly implies so much: And power was given to him that sate thereon to take peace from the Earth, and that they should kill one another, and there was given to him a great Sword, as a token of ex∣ceeding much blood-shed on the Earth under the se∣cond Seal. This Seal therefore begins with Trajan a Spaniard, and therefore an Emperour from the West. In his Reign, and Adrian's his successor, there were so great commotions in the Empire, that there were slain in those. Tumults and Rebellions at least fifteen hundred thousand men.

5. And when he had opened the third Seal, I heard the third Beast, that had a face like a man, and was placed on the South, say, Come and see: And I beheld, and lo a black Horse, and he that sate on him had a pair of balances in his hand. The black colour betokens Gravity, Severity, Justice, which Justice also is intimated by the face of a Man this third Beast is said to have, Prudence and Justice being the proper characters of a Man: Which sutes well with the last part of the description, the pair of Balances in the Riders hand; which argues him Se∣vere, Just, Frugal and Provident.

6. Which accordingly is exprest by that voice in the midst of the four Beasts: And I heard a voice in the midst of the four Beasts say, A measure of wheat for a penny, and three measures of barley for a penny, and see thou hurt not the oyl and wine; that is, the Rider of the black Horse will take special care: 1. That if one Choenix of wheat be sold for a penny, that three of barley shall be sold for a penny. 2. That men shall live by their honest labours, not by theft or rapine: For Choenix signifies 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the food for a day, and Denarius the wages for a days labour. 3. There shall be no stealing nor robbing but buying by measure, though it should prove so hard a time that their dayes labour will but find them food. 4. He will provide that they shall have a Choenix for a penny; (viz.) that the price of bread-corn and necessary victuals shall not exceed a dayes wages. And so of Wine and Oyl, he will take care that there be no 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, no fraud in buying and selling there neither, nor spoil and wast by unruly Soldiers. Which prediction was egregiously fulfilled in Septimius Severus an African, and therefore an Em∣perour

from the South, and in Alexander the Son of Mammea, both of them notorious lovers of Justice, and severe punishers of Thieves and Robbers: To the latter the sight of an unjust Judge was so nauseous, that he was ready to vomit at him; and he was fa∣mous for that Christian Motto, Do as you would be done to: Quod tibi fieri non vis, alteri ne feceris, which he caused to be set up in his Palace, and other pub∣lick places. They are both taken notice of for their care and provision in Bread-corn, and other necessa∣ries of life.

7. And when he had opened the fourth Seal, I heard the fourth Beast, that was like a flying Eagle, and was placed on the North, say, Come and sée.

8. And I looked and behold a pale Horse: which colour of the Horse is very sutable to the Name of the Rider. For it follows; And his name that sate on him was Death: And Hell followed him, that is the Grave, which is made a person here as Death is, and as it were his Lackey to follow him. And Power was given unto them over the fourth part of the Earth, that is over almost all the Roman Em∣pire, which upon due compute was then a third part of the Earth; as if this Power reached three fourths of the Empire. To kill with the Sword, and with Hunger and with Death, that is, with Famine and Pestilence, and with the Beasts of the Earth: Which ordinarily invade the Land in those Eastern and Southern parts in extream Famines and Pesti∣lences to increase the mortality. The beginning of this Seal is from Maximinus the Thracian, and con∣sequently an Emperour from the North, as the place of the flying Eagle denotes, that notable bird of prey, and feeder on dead carcasses, and therefore significant

of the condition of this Seal under which concur so various modes of vast Mortality, the Sword, Famine, Pestilence and wild Beasts. Which Pestilence raging and over-running in a manner the whole Empire for the space of fifteen years, and ending Anno CCLXIII, from Maximinus to this year is the extent of this Seal. And now for the Sword in the Interval of this Seal, besides that in the Reign of Gallus and Volusianus Em∣perours, the whole Empire in a manner was exhau∣sted with rapine and slaughters by the Barbarians, and consequently Tillage did fail and Famine ensue; there were not two more bloody Beasts in the world than Maximinus and Gallienus, the former for his cruelty being called Cyclops, Busiris, Phalaris, and what not, who without accusers or defence, caused to be killed and spoiled of their goods no less than four thousand men; and the latter his cruelty was such that he kil∣led all the Male Sex of whole Cities, and made no∣thing of slaying three or four thousand of his Soldiers in a day. And there are many more examples of hor∣rid cruelty by the Sword under this Seal according to the prediction thereof: So admirably fully was ac∣complished what was predicted by these four Seals, of which it is to be noted, that not only parts of the Introductory Vision are made use of, namely, the four Beasts which usher in each Seal, (I mean the Vi∣sions thereof) as parts of the description of him that appeared in the midst of the seven golden Candle∣sticks in the salutation of each Epistle are again made use of; but as those parts of his description were su∣table to the things signified concerning the Church the Epistle was wrote to, so each Beast is sutable to the things predicted in each Seal in these four first Seals; which strengthens the certainty of the Epistles

being a Prophecy reaching from the beginning of the Church to the end of the World, as well as this of the Sealed Book.

9. And when he had opened the fifth Seal, I saw under the Altar the souls of them that were slain for the Word of God, and for the Testimony which they held: that is, he saw them lye at the foot of the Altar as Sacrifices that are slain use to do, slaughtered or martyred for their couragiously pro∣fessing Christianity: For by Faith, and an invincible Firmness of mind, and unspeakable Patience, they had made themselves an Oblation or Sacrifice for the carrying on the Affairs of the Kingdom of Christ. Here is predicted the bloody ten years persecution begun by Dioclesian, and continued by his successor, which was the most terrible that befell the Church of God. This is the dregs of bitterness in the Smyr∣nean succession of the Church, where by the ten days of Tribulation, this persecution may be more parti∣cularly glanced at, as well as all the Ten Persecutions usually so called.

10. And they cryed with a loud voice, saying, How long, O Lord, holy and true, dost thou not judge and avenge our blood on them that dwell on the Earth? that is, the Persecution of the Church under this Seal was so exceeding grievous that they called aloud for Divine Vengeance on this persecu∣ting Empire.

11. And white Robes were given to every one of them, and they were adopted into the Society of the Blessed: which white Robes allude to the cu∣stome under the Jewish Temple. Where after a due search into their Pedigree, and the unblemishedness of their body, by giving them, or putting on them

a white Vesture they were admitted into the Court of Priests, as these to serve God in Heaven. And it was said unto them, that they should rest yet for a little season, untill their fellow-servants also, and their brethren that should be killed as they were, should be fulfilled: that is, till their fellow-Christians under Licinius, Iulian, and under the Ari∣ans should be slain, after which due vengeance should be taken of the bloody Empire under the time of the Trumpets.

12. And I beheld when he had opened the sixth Seal, and lo! there was a great Earthquake. The Greek word is 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, and may have a more ge∣neral signification, and denote a concussion, shaking and commotion of the frame of things: which things are here the constitution of the Pagan Hierarchy, as I may so call it, or Gentilism, the Religion of the Roman Empire as Pagan. And the Sun became black as sack-cloath of hair, and the Moon be∣came as blood: that is, they were both eclipsed, both the Dragon himself, the Sun, as Head of that Religion, and the Office of their Pontifex Maximus, which is next to the Draconick Majesty, and there intimated by the Moon. These plainly suffered an Eclipse, when the Roman Emperours by professing Christianity renounced Satan with all the wicked crew of evil Spirits under him, and would serve him no more, nor exercise the Office of his Pontifex Ma∣ximus, as is recorded of Constantine, Constantius, Va∣lentinianus, and Valens, and Gratian would not so much as retain the name of Pontifex Maximus.

13. And the stars of Heaven fell unto the Earth even as a Fig-trée casteth her untimely figs when she is shaken with a mighty wind: that is, all the

false gods of this Diabolical Polity, the frame of the Pagan Religion, they fell from that Religious Ho∣nour and Worship which was given them, and were trampled under-foot by the prevailing Christians, as also their Priests that served them.

14. And the Heaven departed as a scrowl when it is rolled together: that is, this Pagan Hierarchy shrivelled up with all the false Deities and Priests therein, as a scrowl of parchment that hides the let∣ters therein contained as it is rolled up. And every Mountain and Island were removed out of their places: that is, their high places where they sacri∣ficed, and their Temples divided from other houses for their supposed sacredness, were demolished at last by Theodosius.

15. And the Kings of the earth, and the great men, and the rich men, and the chief captains, and the mighty men, and every bondman, and every fréeman hid themselves in the dens and in the rocks of the mountains: that is, all sorts of men from the highest to the lowest were sorely affrighted and dis∣mayed at this terrible storm that came upon the Pagan Hierarchy, nor were able to resist the force thereof, not Maximianus Galerius, not Maxentius, not Maximi∣nus with Martinianus Caesar, not Licinius, nor Iulian the Apostate, who all felt the irresistible Power and Wrath of the Lamb; and some of them, (viz.) Gale∣rius, Maximinus and Licinius, their miserable condi∣tions even whether they would or no, forced them by open confession to give Glory to God.

16. And said to the mountains and rocks, Fall on us and hide us from the face of him that sitteth on the Throne, and from the wrath of the Lamb: like that of Esay 2.20. And they shall go into the

holes of the rocks, and into the caves of the earth, for the fear of the Lord, and for the Glory of his Majesty, when he ariseth to shake terribly the Earth; as he did in this shaking of the Pagan Religion of the Empire, and abolishing their Idols.

17. For the great day of his wrath is come, and who shall be able to stand? Not Galerius, not Max∣entius, not Licinius, nor Iulian, nor the Tyrants Eu∣genius, and Argobastus, with all the Power the Pagan party were able to make, could stand against this storm of the wrath of the Lamb. So that the Church upon the Conversion of Constantine to the Faith en∣tred into the state of the Pergamenian succession be∣ing exalted out of the dust: And O that she had not been thereupon exalted so much in her own mind, and become the Pergamenian succession in the worst sense, that is, proud and cruel, as well as exalted in Power.

CHAPTER VII.

HItherto the first six Seals which are contempo∣rary with the Ephesine and Smyrnean succes∣sion, and with the forepart of the Pergamenian; while the Church was only exalted out of her Smyrnean af∣fliction, (in which she had been so trod to the ground) not yet grown haughty and Antichristian, and perse∣cutive of the true members of Christ, nor apostatized into gross Superstition and Idolatry as she was after in the far greatest part of the Pergamenian Interval, and in all the Thyatirian, in both which the eating things offered unto Idols is mentioned: which tract of time is equal to the first six Trumpets, which toge∣ther

with the seven Thunders fill up the whole space of the seventh Seal: Which seven Thunders are put in the place of the seventh Trumpet on purpose, that the six first Trumpets may be noted as a more pecu∣liar space of time, wherein as vengeance was taken on the Roman Empire by the Incursion of the Barba∣rous Nations for the persecution of the Primitive Christians, so in the mean time a kind of Paganochri∣stianism and Antichristian Power sprung up in the Church, and grew to the height: I say, this being the condition of things under the first six Trumpets, the artifice of the following transition from the first six Seals to them is admirable, and of grand conside∣ration. The hundred forty four thousand sealed, and so taken special notice of by Divine Providence, in∣timating, that the true Apostolick Church should be still preserved all this time, notwithstanding all the incursions and devastations of the Barbarians, and all the gross Apostasie, Idolatry and Antichristian cruelty from a wickedly degenerated Church, against Christs true members, that held to the pure Apostolick faith and practice.

1. And after these things, (viz.) after the open∣ing the six Seals, I saw four Angels standing on the four corners of the Earth, holding the four winds of the Earth: that is, He saw the Ministers of Gods Power in making War and Peace, and blu∣sters in the world, and that at that time they held all in peace as for any Incursions of the Barbarians into the Empire. That the wind should not blow on the Earth, nor on the Sea, nor on any Tree: should not blow down buildings, nor cause ship∣wracks on the sea, nor break off branches of trees, or tear them up by the root. Houses, Ships and Trees

in analogie, signifying Political Fabricks and Consti∣tutions. And the Babylonian Kingdom in Daniel is expresly represented by a Tree.

2. And I saw another Angel ascending from the East: that is, from Christ, * one of whose Titles is the East, having the Seal of the Living God, ha∣ving a Commission from Christ to protect such cer∣tain men from the imminent destruction now coming upon the Empire. And he therefore cryed with a loud voice to the four Angels to whom it was gi∣ven to hurt the Earth and the Sea; that is, to raise tempests of War and Invasion on the Empire.

3. Saying, Hurt not the earth, neither the sea nor the trees; that is, forbear to bring in those tem∣pests of the Barbarians upon the Empire; Till we have sealed the servants of our God in their foreheads: That is, marked them out for delive∣rance and protection: Which insinuates the assured Providence of Christ over his True Church, and li∣ving Members of his Body, in all that confusion and corruption that would be under the first six Trum∣pets.

4. And I heard the number of them that were sealed: which is not numerally to be understood but symbolically, noting the condition of the sealed, And there were sealed an hundred forty four thousand: Which Chiliads or Thousands are Cubical numbers, and signifie therefore Stability or Constancy: But it is said there were an hundred forty four thousands, it being the square number of these Chiliads or Compa∣nies, of which the Root is Twelve, which is the Apo∣stolical number: Of all the Tribes of the children of Israel; namely, the twelve Patriarchs typically or figuratively, being put for the twelve Apostles, and

the children of Israel for the Church of Christ, of which the Israelites are here a Type, as they are in the Epistle to the Church in Pergamus, in which Perga∣menian Interval this sealing begins: Wherefore brief∣ly by the hundred forty four thousands, are meant the faithful, constant Apostolick Christians that sub∣mitted not to the Tyranny and Idolatry of the Apo∣statized Church, but were preserved pure and safe by Divine Providence during the sounding of the first six Trumpets, under which notwithstanding the Em∣pire was broken in pieces, and the Tyranny and Ido∣latry of Antichrist rising, and increasing, and growing to the height. So great was the Providence of God in his preservation and protection of his truly Aposto∣lick Church for all this.

5. Of the Tribe of Iuda were sealed twelve thousand: Of the Tribe of Reuben were sealed twelve thousand: Of the Tribe of Gad were seal∣ed twelve thousand. The order is much invert∣ed and confounded in this numbring of the twelve Tribes, besides that Dan is left out and Ephraims name is suppressed; because those two Tribes were the ring-leaders to Idolatry, (Iudges chap. 17.18.) But Iuda is here put before Reuben, because Christ was of the Tribe of Iuda; but Reuben keeps the se∣cond place, as by birthright, it being fit he should yield to no other, especially his courage having been so notable in battles for the Lord, Numb. 33. and Ios. 4. Gads valour also has purchased him the next place; besides, that Elias and Iehu the destroyers of Baal and his worship were of the Tribe of Gad.

6. And of the Tribe of Aser were sealed twelve thousand: This Tribe also is notable for the woman of Sarepta that entertained Elias that great Cham∣pion

against the Baalitish Idolatry, and for Anna the Prophetess that gave testimony to Christ when he was presented in the Temple. And these are the first four Sons of Leah. Of the Tribe of Nephthali were sealed twelve thousand. Of the Tribe of Manasses were sealed twelve thousand. Nephthali is here placed, and Manasses before their Seniours, Simeon, Levi, Issachar and Zabulon; the former, be∣cause that Tribe is so much ennobled by the story of Barac the Conquerour of Sisera, and for Capernaum that See as it were of that great Bishop of Souls Je∣sus Christ, whose residence was so much at Caper∣naum a City of Galilee, that belongs to Nephthali, insomuch that he was called a Galilean: And the la∣ter for the feats of Gideon the destroyer of the Al∣tar of Baal, who was of the Tribe of Manasses, as was also Elisha, upon whom the Spirit of Elias rest∣ed, and who was sent to anoint Iehu King, that sore executioner of Iezebel.

7. Of the Tribe of Simeon were sealed twelve thousand. Of the Tribe of Levi were sealed twelve thousand. Of the Tribe of Issachar were sealed twelve thousand.

8. Of the Tribe of Zabulon were sealed twelve thousand. These four last Sons of Leah were rank∣ed according to their birth, there being nothing exi∣mious in them, or if there was, it being blotted again by some contrary miscarriages, so that there was no extraordinary merit to break the order of their birth. Of the Tribe of Ioseph were sealed twelve thou∣sand. Of the Tribe of Benjamin were sealed twelve thousand. Which two Tribes nominated from the other two Sons of Rachel, as the Tribe of Nephthali and Manasses before from her other two, are

thrust down into this lowest place, and the Tribe of Ioseph here put for the Tribe of Ephraim, whose name is here suppressed, because of the foul faults of that Tribe of Ephraim in Micha, Ieroboam and Ahab all Ephraimites: And Benjamin juniour of all is rightly placed last: But upon the account of the whole we see the ranking and ordering of the names of the Tribes is so fitted as to represent a company zealous for Christ, and as zealous against Antichrist, (as be∣ing that very Virgin Company with the Lamb on Mount Sion, Chap. 14.) and against Spiritual Whore∣dom which is Idolatry. This pure Apostolick Church did Christ seal and keep safe even during all that dan∣gerous time under the sounding of the first six Trum∣pets.

9. After this I beheld, and lo, a great multi∣tude which no man could number of all nations, and kindreds, and people, and tongues stood before the Throne, and before the Lamb: Namely, before that Throne above described in Heaven. For Iohn is supposed to see all these Visions in Heaven, though they concern things here on Earth: Clothed in white robes and palms in their hands. This part of the Vision therefore shoots beyond the Per∣gamenian and Thyatirian Interval of the Church, and begins with the Sardian. Which enjoyes that pro∣mise to him that overcomes, that he shall have power over the Nations; that is, whole Nations, Tongues and People are now become open professors of the pure Apostolick Faith: this is the effect of their vi∣ctory, and the sign thereof, the Palm-branches in their hands. They are the same with them that have got the victory over the Beast, his Image and his Mark, and the number of his Name, and sing the Song of

Moses and of the Lamb, Chap. 15. Which is the com∣mencement also of the Sardian succession, which sig∣nifies a Song of Joy.

10. And it is here said: And they cryed with a loud voice, saying, Salvation unto our God which sitteth upon the Throne, and unto the Lamb: Namely, because he has thus delivered his Israel from the Antichristian bondage and persecution they were under in the Pergamenian and Thyatirian successions.

11. And all the Angels stood round about the Throne, and about the Elders and four Beasts, and fell before the Throne with their fates, and worshipped God: This may seem to strike further into those Ages of the Church that come near to, or are in the Blessed Millennium, to those of the Phila∣delphian Interval, which are as it were the Succession and Off-spring of the Apostolick Church that held out in the most persecuting times of Antichrist, and are all held as one continued Church, but growing and spreading further. In which Angelical Times the consent and harmony of Heaven and Earth will be more full and more perfectly united and accorded: So that it is no wonder it is said that the Angels joynt∣ly with the Elders and four Beasts did fall before the Throne on their faces and worship God.

12. Saying, Amen. Blessing, and glory, and wisdome, and thanksgiving, and honour, and power, and might: by which these happy and hea∣venly Times are brought upon Earth; be unto God for ever and ever. Amen.

13. And one of the Elders answered, saying unto me, What are these that are arayed in white Robes? and whence came they? that is to say, how come the true Apostolick Church in these dayes that

are here foreseen, to be so prosperous, and successfull, and victorious? For to be clothed in white, signifies so in the Prophetick stile.

14. And I said unto him, Sir, thou knowest: And he said to me, These are they which come out of great tribulation, and have washed their Robes, and made them white in the blood of the Lamb: that is, these times of the Church that are thus prosperous, as well as holy, it is in vertue of the great tribulation and affliction, their predecessors en∣dured under the cruel and bloody persecutions of Antichrist: So that they have washed their Robes as it were, and made them white in the blood of the Lamb: that is, the sufferings of Christ in his true and living members under Antichrist were the Instru∣mental Cause of the splendid and prosperous conditi∣on of the blessed Times that are here prefigured, in or near the Millennium, as the blood of the Lamb in the usual sense is justly deemed the meritorious cause thereof.

15. Therefore are they before the Throne of God, and serve him day and night in his Temple, ever thankfully mindfull of the Evil they are delivered from, and the great good they enjoy. In vertue of the former sufferings of the true Apostolick Church under the Antichristian Tyranny, shall the Church in these dayes here described enjoy peaceably their Religion, and make their addresses to God conti∣nually in safety in his Holy Church, which is his Tem∣ple. And he that sitteth on the Throne shall dwell among them. For these are the times of Iehovah Shammah. Of the Tabernacle of God amongst Men, the times of the New Ierusalem.

16. They shall hunger no more, nor thirst any more: They shall not be false-fed nor hunger-star∣ved by deceitful Teachers, that cannot impart to them the bread of Life, nor raise the Spirit of Life in them by their Ministry (as being devoid of it themselves) whereby their thirst may be satisfied. Neither wall any Sun light on them, nor any heat. There shall no Political Power whatsoever ty∣rannize over their consciences, and by their persecu∣tion force them, as was usuall under Antichrist, to a sapless, senseless, heartless, nay grosly Superstitious and Idolatrous Religion against their own judgement and inward sense of things.

17. For the Lamb that is in the midst of the Throne shall feed them, and shall lead them unto living fountains of waters: that is, Christ him∣self, by his Spirit, and by true Spiritual Guides and Governours, to whom he has communicated his Spi∣rit, shall feed them; that is, guide and govern them, and shall lead them unto Living Fountains of waters, shall conduct them into, and guide them in the Dis∣pensation of Life, the renovation of their inward Man into the Living Image of God. And God shall wipe all tears from their eyes. They shall be no more calamitous by the wrongs and persecutions of bloody Tyrants, whether Spiritual or Temporal. For the true Apostolick Church shall then be an impregnable City or Polity of it self, the New Ierusalem as it is descri∣bed in the 21 Chapter of the Apocalypse. This is the sense of this transition from the six first Seals to the opening of the last, and reaches from the beginning of the corrupt part of the Pergamenian Interval to the end of the Laodicean.

NOTES. CHAPTER VII. Vers. 2.

One of whose Titles is the East. This is D^r Ham∣monds sense upon the place, and it is I think not only ingenious but true. For 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the East, is with the Cabbalists the Eternal Wisdom of God, that is, the Eternal Word which is Christ. And 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 is the very word in the Text, the same that occurrs Luke 1. vers. 78. whereby 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the Day-spring from on high has visited us, which is there understood of Christ, as also, Zachar. 3.8. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, and chap. 6.12. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Ecce vir, Oriens nomen ejus. And Jerem. 23.5. he is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, as also chap. 33.14. All which places not only the Christians, but the Iews understood of the Messias: So plain is it, that 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which is, Oriens, the East or Day-spring is a Name or Title of Christ. And though in those places of the Old Testament it is translated Germen, a Branch, as 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 most ordinarily signifies, yet being it may also signifie light or shining, and that 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 in what sense soever is a Title of Christ, and yet does usually signifie the East, that the word here may be allusively used to signifie Christ, is to me abundantly rational: See Do∣ctor Hammond upon Luk. 1. v. 78.

CHAPTER VIII.

1. ANd when he had opened the seventh Seal, there was silence in Heaven about the space of half an hour. This is spoken in allusion to the custome in the service of the Temple, where though in the former part of their Service, while the Sacrifices were offered the Temple rang again with their loud Musick, yet in the time of Incense, all were silent and in their tacit devotions.

2. And I saw seven Angels which stood before God, and to them were given seven Trumpets. This he saw during this silence, or at the beginning thereof.

3. And another Angel came and stood at the Al∣tar having a golden Censer, and there was given unto him much Incense, that he should offer it with the prayers of the Saints upon the golden Altar, which was before the Throne. Things thus represented in Heaven prefigure things here on Earth, and these Ceremonies of the Temple, the Devotions of the Christians, whose prayers are here represented as coming up in remembrance before God: Which is expressed in this Judaical way or Ceremony of the Temple by the giving to this Angel as to a Priest much Incense, that he should offer it with the prayers of all Saints upon the golden Altar, which was before the Throne, answering to the Altar of Incense over∣laid with Gold, that stood before the Sanctum San∣ctorum.

4. And the smoke of the Incense which came with the prayers of the Saints ascended up before God out of the Angels hand: that is, the desire of

the true Church, who are of one mind with God, as∣cended up before God, as Incense out of a Priests hand, and was known and accepted with him. Their prayers in all likelihood were in general for the pre∣servation of the Church, and suppression of both the old and new growing abominations of the Empire.

5. And to the end that you may know what the will of God was in order hereunto, it is further ad∣ded; And the Angel took the Censer and filled it with the fire of the Altar, and cast it into the Earth: and there were voices, and thundrings, and lightnings, and an earthquake. Which things betoken the wrath of God to be poured upon the bloody persecuting Roman Empire, against whom the souls of the slain under the Altar had called for ven∣geance, chap. 6.10. The great tempests and commo∣tions that should befall it are thus expressed in the ge∣neral, and as an effect of the foregoing groans and cryes of his aggrieved people.

6. And the seven Angels that had the seven Trumpets prepared themselves to sound. And therefore those Tempests and Calamities will now more particularly be described in the several sound∣ings of those Angels that have the seven Trumpets.

7. So the first Angel sounded, and there follow∣ed hail, and fire mingled with blood: that is, a thundring hail-storm with fire, whereby is signified the furious Invasion of the Barbarians into the Em∣pire. And the mention of blood seems on purpose to be added, that there may be no mistake, as if this storm was to be upon trees and grass, and not upon men, though it follows: And they were cast upon the earth, and the third part of trees was burnt up, and all green grass was burnt up: Which

the mention of blood shows not to be understood of earth, trees and grass that bleed not, but of the men of the Roman Empire great and small: Trees signi∣fying the Great Ones, and the Grass the Common People. And that it is understood of the Roman Empire is plainly intimated from hence, that the third part is said to be burnt up: Which third part does not signifie the third part of the Roman Empire, but simply the Roman Empire, the Empire being the third part of the known world in S^t Iohn's time: So that here, as in other places hereafter, Third part, is not to be taken numerally or proportionally but symbolically, * as a character of the Roman Empire. The Imple∣tion of this Trumpet began about the year 395, when Alaricus invaded the Empire with an infinite number of Gothes, and other Barbarians, especially the Eastern part thereof, harassing it for five years together. And in the year 401 the same Alaricus, with Gothes, A∣lans, Hunnes broke into Italy also, and besieged Hono∣rius the Emperour at Hasta, and so terrified the In∣habitants of Italy, that they were in a manner all rea∣dy to leave their dwellings: But with much ado, partly by the valour of Stilico Honorius his General, partly by the fair treaty of Honorius, he was content to recede into Illyricum, a Province of the Eastern Empire. But Alaricus being quiet for a while, there was Anno 404 a notorious irruption of the Barba∣rians into Italy to the number of two hundred thou∣sand under their General Radagaisus a Scythian, who yet was slain by Stilico. And yet there was a third, and that the most grievous irruption of all, An. 406 into the west, an innumerous multitude of Vandals, Alans, Marcomans, Herules, Suedes, Alemans, Burgun∣dians, and other Barbarians, with which France, Spain,

and lastly Africk were filled and miserably afflicted: So punctually is this prediction of the hail-storm un∣der the first Trumpet here fulfilled.

8. And the second Angel sounded, and as it were a great mountain burning with fire was cast into the sea, and the third part of the sea became blood: that is to say, a great City, namely, Rome it self, (for so Mountain signifies in the Prophetick stile, and Sea the extent of Jurisdiction or Dominion) by its being taken by Alaricus King of the Gothes, who after the death of Stilico, Anno 410, made a new and more fatal expedition into Italy: This case, I say, of this City being taken by Alaricus was as if a burning Mountain had been cast into the Sea, the earthiness and fieriness thereof being so contrary and mischie∣vous to water. And so was this condition of the City of Rome to the Territories and Jurisdiction there∣of: Which Sea signifies, the number Three or Third being the character of the Roman Empire: For up∣on this taking of the City did presently ensue the di∣laceration or tearing in pieces of the Roman Jurisdi∣ction into many Kingdoms: So that the entireness of the Roman Dominion was plainly destroyed. Whence the Sea is said to become blood, that is, to be dead, and to be dead is to cease to be what a thing was be∣fore, namely, the Romanum Imperium, properly so called, and as to the former sense thereof failing, when it was now divided into so many Kingdoms: Which division Honorius was forced to begin by his Covenant which he made with Alaricus for the re∣gaining the City of Rome again, and the Empire to himself; as he was likewise forced to make such like Covenants with others: and so the Roman Empire was still more and more divided, till about the year

455, when Rome was again sacked by Gensericus the Vandal, or a little after, it was plainly divided into ten Kingdoms.

9. And the third part of the Creatures which were in the Sea and had life died, and the third part of the ships were destroyed: that is, the Ro∣man both Men and profitable constitutions of things were altered, and ceased to be what they were: Which here in Analogie to Sea are intimated to be Fishes, they being the living Creatures proper to the Sea, and plainly said to be Ships. These now had lost their former propriety, and they are no longer the entire Roman Empire's but each respective King∣dom's to which they belong, to say nothing of the real destruction of many. And this I think is a fair Im∣pletion of the second Trumpets prediction.

10. And the third Angel sounded, and there fell a great Star from Heaven burning as it were a Lamp: As if it were a fair Comet called Lampadi∣as, which betokens the greatness of the Prince it de∣notes, and also the shortness of his Reign. And it fell upon the third part of the Rivers, and upon the Fountains of waters. The burning of it de∣notes the mischief to the Rivers and Fountains it is said to fall into. Which Rivers are Provincial Magi∣strates or Armies, and the Fountains of Waters Pro∣vincial Cities. And here is mention again made of the Third part, that you may know the prediction belongs to the Roman Empire. And it is no wonder this falling Star or Comet should be looked upon as so mischievous to Rivers and Waters, when Natural History speaks of falling Comets that have drunk up whole Rivers; so decorous is the representation.

11. And the name of the Star is called Worm∣wood; and the third part of the waters became Wormwood, and many men died of the waters because they were made bitter: that is, the condi∣tion of this Princes Reign was such, that the Roman Territories were so full of affliction and calamity, that their life was bitter to them, besides the slaugh∣ter of many in wars. Now this Prince was the We∣stern Caesar, who from the time that Gensericus sack∣ed and pillaged Rome, which was Anno 455, strug∣ling with Death for a while in the succession of those inconsiderable and unfortunate Caesars, Avitus, Majo∣ranus, Severus, Anthemius, Olybrius, Glycerius, Nepos, at last expired in Augustulus, into which Name the Western Caesar had dwindled, and under which that Caesareat was quite extinguished by Odoacer King of Herules, to the bitter misery of the Fountains and Ri∣vers, the Cities and Magistrates Provincial. Thus did the third Trumpet sound the sad final fate of the We∣stern Caesareat, under the figure of a great falling Star, called Wormwood; which Odoacer cast down and extinguished, and reigned himself King of Italy sixteen years, who restored to Rome her Consulate which he had taken away before. And King Theo∣doricus that vanquished him and succeeded him, so rebuilt Rome, and restored to it all the Ancient Ma∣gistracies, Honours and Priviledges belonging to it, that bating the memory of her misery and infamy, she seemed perfectly restored to her former Glory and Felicity; and thus she continued through the Reign of several successors of Theodoricus.

12. But the fourth Angel sounded, and the third part of the Sun was smitten, and the third part of the Moon, and the third part of the Stars, so

as the third part of them was darkened, and the day shone not for a third part of it, and the night likewise: that is, there is nothing of the Roman lu∣stre of the lower or higher degree left. For that this belongs to Rome, the wonted character [Third] plain∣ly shews: Therefore under this Trumpet there is no longer at last any King of Rome, denoted by the Sun, nor Consular Power, nor Senatorian, nor the Power of other known Ancient Magistrates of Rome, deno∣ted by the Moon and Stars; but the City at last, namely, after that from the year 542, in the Ostro∣gothick War by Belisarius and Narsus, Iustinian's Ge∣nerals, it was deprived of the Consular Power, and after taken twice by Totilas, and burnt, and retaken by Narses, and a little after struck to the ground by thunder, and lightning, and tempest, being despoiled of all Ancient Ranks of Roman Magistracy, sunk to that ignoble and obscure Title of the Dutchy of Rome, and after was forced to pay Tribute to Ravenna (un∣der the Exarchate) a City that before had been sub∣ject to her. In which inglorious state she continued till the year 750: Which year is the Epocha of that notable Interval of the Kingdom of the Saracens from the beginning of the Caliphate of the Abasidae (who first made Bagdad their Imperial Seat) to the taking of the said Bagdad by Togrulbeck King of the Turks, which was in the year 1055. And this is the easie and natural sense of the fourth Trumpet, and perfect∣ly fills up the scope thereof.

13. And I beheld, and heard an Angel flying through the midst of Heaven, saying with a loud voice, Wo, wo, wo to the Inhabiters of the Earth, by reason of the other voices of the Trum∣pet of the three Angels which are yet to sound.

These Woes are denounced against the Roman Em∣pire, who by this time, besides the guilt of the blood of the Primitive Martyrs, had in a gross manner lap∣sed into a kind of Paganochristian Idolatry, which they would be found in under these following Trum∣pets, and in cruel persecutions of the Apostolick Mem∣bers of the Church that would not submit to their Idolatrous Paganochristianisme: Wherefore venge∣ance proportionable to their redoubled wickedness shall be poured down upon them under the voices of the Trumpet of the three Angels that are to come.

NOTES. CHAPTER VIII. Vers. 7.

As a character of the Roman Empire, &c. That the third part, or subtriple proportion is a character of the Roman Empire, will appear from Chap. 12. vers. 4. where the Dragon with seven Heads and ten Horns, which is undoubtedly the Roman Empire Pagan, is said with his taile to have drawn the third part of the Stars of Heaven, and cast them to the Earth: Which in the Prophetick stile is as much as to say, that he had brought down a third part of the Princes or Rulers of the known world in that time, and subjected them to himself; that is, that the Roman Power had subdued a third part of the Powers and Principalities of the World to her self. For Heaven and Earth are the parts of a Political World as well as of a Natural: And the Stars of the Political World are the several Princes or Rulers thereof. But when they are subjected to some other great Potentate, then they cease to be fixed Stars, but fall to the Earth, that is, to the low estate of subjection, or are

utterly extinct. And in that they are said to be cast down by the taile of the Dragon; by his taile is under∣stood his Retinue, his Train, Military especially, his Ar∣mies and Forces whether by Land or by Sea. This is a most assured sense of the Prophetick stile, and that there∣fore the amplitude of the Roman Dominion is hinted by the third part of Stars cast down to the Earth by the Dragons Taile, as if it were about the third part of the known world in S^t John's time. And that consequently this subtriple proportion is an intended character of the Roman Empire, whereby we may know, that such or such a Vision belongs to it. And thus to give characters from Numbers and Proportions is according to the Cabba∣listical mode, and the very Genius of this Book which is Cabbalistical. And it is absurd to think there should be so repeated a mention of a third part so perpetually of things (as if Divine Providence had a peculiar pique against the third part of things or persons more than any other part, as it may seem in at beast a dozen places in the Apocalypse) were it not there were this mystery un∣der it.

CHAPTER IX.

1. ANd the filth Angel sounded, and I saw a Star * fallen from Heaven to Earth, that is, a lapsed Spirit or Angel, a Devil if you will. For as a Star signifies an Angel, so a fallen Star a lapsed Angel. And to him was given the Key of the bot∣tomless pit: That is, he had great Power in the Kingdom of darkness, of which a Key is a Symbol.

2. And he opened the bottomless Pit, and there rose a smoke out of the Pit, as the smoke of a

great furnace: That is, there arose a hot and hel∣lish zeal conjoyned with dark Ignorance for the Im∣posturous Religion of Mahomet. And the Sun and the Air were darkened by reason of the smoke of the Pit: That is, the Gospel of the Sun of Righte∣ousness was endeavoured to be clouded and eclipsed by the over-running force and false pretenses of Mo∣notheisme, and of a more pure worship in Mahome∣tisme.

2. And there came out of the smoke Locusts up∣on the Earth: That is, under this dark, ignorant, and false pretense, the Saracens professors of the Ma∣hometan Religion spread themselves over the Earth. And unto them was given power as the scorpions of the Earth have power; to have their sting and poison in their taile; which deadly sting and poison in the Saracens was the falseness of their Religion, which they transfused at the end of their conquests. That was the poisonous sting to all conscientious Chri∣stians; and to others it was at least poison if not a sting.

4. And it was commanded them that they should not hurt the grass of the Earth, neither any green thing, neither any tree: Which here in Analogie stand for several orders of Men, as the Lo∣custs for the Saracens. But only those men, that have not the seal of God in their foreheads; which intimates, that notwithstanding the grassations of these Impostors, the truly Apostolick Church would be kept safe. And there is mention made of Men, to insinuate, that these Locusts were also men, not mere insects: For Locusts do not fall upon Men, but upon Grass and Trees.

5. And to them it was given that they should

not kill them: That is, that these Saracens should indeed infest the Roman Empire sore, but not de∣stroy it quite, as after happened by the Euphratean Horsemen: But that they should be tormented five months; that is, during their time of lying upon it, called here five months in allusion to the time of Lo∣custs who live about that space of time, as Natura∣lists relate: But their continuance in vexing Italy was not much above five months of years, if that may be particularly glanced at. And their torment was as the torment of a Scorpion when he stri∣keth a man: (viz.) lesser at first, but increasing up∣on him: and the stroke being by the Serpentine taile of the Locusts, it shows the poison and sting to be Diabolical, and to cause such vexations of mind as that poison is apt to breed. And as the torment of a Scorpion when he strikes a man is from a white poi∣son transfused in the stroke, as Apollodorus relates in Pliny, lib. 11. So it is that perversly pretended Mo∣notheisme of these Saracens, that looks so fairly and innocently on it, with which they might perplex and torment the minds of the unsealed, and sorely disquiet their consciences, besides the general fear of their lives in them that would not turn Mahometans, the Sara∣cens Wars being carried on upon a Religious account, as is to be noted in their Alchoran and Zuna, and they great Zelots, and diligent promoters of their Religi∣on, as being the most Early Professors of it; and as it is signified by their Type, these Scorpion Locusts, it being * the nature of the Scorpion perpetually to at∣tempt to sting and transfuse her poison, as of these Saracens to proselyte the world to their Religion.

6. Wherefore the fear of death, and horrour of conscience did so vex men, and fill them with anxie∣ty,

that it was worse than death it self, to be in such perpetual danger, and unsettledness of things worse than the Christians are now in under the Turks, which were a desirable condition to them, rather than these perpetual renewed vexations of the Saracens; but this did not fall to their lot in the Saracens dayes, though it were the more desirable condition of the two; which may be glanced at in these words: And in those dayes shall men seek death and shall not find it, and shall desire to dye, and death shall flée from them: That is, those parts of the Empire shall not be setled in the Saracens hands where they Inva∣ded, as afterwards it came to pass in the Turks Inva∣sion, who seized on the Eastern part of the Empire, and setled there; so that the Empire there was not only vexed but killed, extinguished, or put an end to, and the minds of the conquered at quiet.

7. And the shapes of the Locusts were like unto Horses prepared to battel: That is, ready harnes∣sed, as it is said afterwards, that they have Breast-plates of Iron, which shows the courage of these Sa∣racens, and their well-appointedness for War; and their success was accordingly, as is expressed by what follows: And on their heads were as it were crowns of Gold. Which shows their victory over so many Nations and Kingdoms: For in the space of eight years, or a little more, they acquired to that Satanical Kingdom of Mahomet, Palestine, Syria, both the Armenia's, all Asia minor, in a manner; Persia, In∣dia, Aegypt, Numidia, all Barbarie to the River Ni∣ger, Lusitania and Hispania; nor were they stinted here, but won also a great part of Italy, even to the Gates of Rome. To which you may add Sicily, Can∣dia, Cyprus, and the rest of the Mediterranean Islands.

Wherefore there is great reason that they should be represented with golden Crowns on their heads, they having acquired so many Rich Kingdoms by War. And their faces were as the faces of men: The better to assure the Reader that Men indeed are meant and not Infects or mere Locusts.

8. And they had hair as the hair of women, to show what Countrey-men they were, not for any ef∣feminacy or cowardize in them; namely, that they are derived from the Arabians, whose custom it was to wear long hair on their head unshorn, and an head-tire like women. This therefore shows they are Saracens from Arabia; and in that it is said, And their téeth were as the téeth of Lions: that shows, that they were very dispatchfull of their prey, who could devour so many Kingdoms in so little time, as was above noted.

9. And they had breast-plates, as it were breast-plates of Iron: That is, they were well armed to fight, and had an Iron courage. And the sound of their wings was as the sound of Chariots of many horses running to battel. Here is mention of wings, in allusion to the figure of Locusts, who also make a noise with their wings when they fly; but the sound of Chariots of many horses running to battel, emplyes that they are indeed Men, and great Warriours, that with great swiftness, noise and terrour run down all before them, witness the above-mentioned conquests which were so large and so many.

10. And they had tails like unto Scorpions, and there were stings in their tails: That is, they are of the Serpentine kind, of the Ancient Serpent that was alwayes an Enemy to the Son of God and his Kingdom; and it denotes, that with their con∣quests

they would bring in a Religion contrary to that of Christ, and destroy the worship of the Son of God under an ignorant pretense of Monotheisme, as if the Christian Religion were inconsistent with the worship of one God, whereas the more distinct knowledge of that one God does not make us less Monotheists than they. This is the up-shot of their victories, and the very sting and poison their at∣chievements end in. And their power was to hurt men five months: That is, to hurt and vex the Em∣pire particularly, but not quite to destroy it, as the Turks did afterwards. Nor is it said here, to hurt the third part of Men, as in the former Trumpets, be∣cause their Invasions were not restrained to the Em∣pire, but ran over other vast Tracts of the habitable world also. But they are said to hurt men five months, in allusion to the life of Locusts, as I noted above. And if mention be made of five months twice to remind us to double the number; that is another character, whereby we may discern, that the Saracens are here meant by these Locusts; twice five months of years, (viz.) three hundred years (saving that there is the difference of five single years, which is nothing in the numbering by months of years) being that most notable Interval in the Saracenical Kingdom, name∣ly from the beginning of the Caliphate of the Aba∣sidae, who first made Bagdad their Imperial seat, to the taking of the said Bagdad by Togrulbec King of the Turks; that is, from the year of Christ 750, to the year 1055. But otherwise I conceive that five months do not signifie Arithmetically but Symbolically with an allusion to the time of the Locusts, and only stand for the time that the Saracens had to hurt men, not defining how long it was to be.

11. And they had a King over them, which is the Angel of the bottomless Pit. The same that the fallen Star, to whom was given the Key of the bottomless pit, it being an Ensign of his Power in the Kingdom of darkness, as I noted above. This was the Supreme Captain of these Troops of Locusts, that is Saracens, and his name denotes his nature as follows. Whose name in the Hebrew tongue is Abaddon, but in the Greek tongue hath his name Apollyon; both which words signifie a Destroyer, which is a fit title, he being a Captain of such nume∣rous Troops, that destroyed so many mens bodies by war, and their souls by bringing a false Religion a∣long with him contrary to Christianity, reproaching it, as if it maintained the worship of more Gods than One: Which malicious pretense seems also to be glan∣ced at in both the name of Abaddon, and also of A∣pollyon; Abaddon alluding to Adad, as if it were Ab-Addon, and Apollyon, to 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Apollo, both which names according to this allusion signifie ONE. As if this Angel of the Abysse and his Locusts stood up for the worship of one God, and that the Christians worshipped many, because they worship the holy Trinity, which nothing but their ignorance of the Mystery, and their malice could make them con∣clude to be inconsistent with the Unity of the Dei∣ty. Which passage therefore of the Vision is no small countenance to the Doctrine of the Trinity of the Godhead.

12. One wo is past, and behold there come two woes more hereafter; namely, under the sounding of the next two Trumpets, which therefore as the former may well be called Wo-Trumpets.

13. And the sixth Angel sounded, and I heard voice from the four horns of the golden Altar which is before God. For Iohn rapt thus into Hea∣ven, the Temple and the Throne of God was as it were continually represented to him, and so the gol∣den Altar, which is the Altar of Incense. And In∣cense is the Symbol of the prayers and breathing of the pure Apostolick Church oppressed and afflicted under that Antichristian or Pseudochristian and Ido∣latrous Constitution of things established by the se∣cond Nicene Council.

14. Saying unto the sixth Angel that had the Trumpet, Loose the four Angels which are bound in the great river Euphrates: That is, let loose the Turks upon the Idolatrous Empire. For that An∣gels signifie Men under their conduct, is a frequent Apocalyptical Figure. And that the Turks are here meant is plain from those more notable four * Tur∣kish Sultanies or Tetrarchies on that and this side of Euphrates, that of Bagdad, that of Caesarea Cappa∣docie or Iconii, that of Aleppo, and that of Dama∣scus.

15. And the four Angels were loosed which were prepared for an hour, and a day, and a month, and a year, for to slay the third part of men. Which term of time is another indication, that the Turks are meant here. For Togrulbec Prince of the Turks, the City Bagdad being taken by him, had his Imperial Robes put upon him and was inaugurated Emperour of the Turks by the Caliph Chaiim Biamrilla in the year 1057. From this time was the Turk inve∣sted in the Saracenical Empire. And from this year to the year 1453, when Constantinople was taken, and the remainder of the Roman Empire in the East

utterly lost, is a Prophetical day, and a month, and a year; that is, 396 years: So notable an Indication is this, that the Turks are here meant; and the sense is this, That these Turks were prepared 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 a∣gainst a determined appointed time, even to the ex∣piration of 396 years, for to slay the third part of men, that is, that about that time they might not vex only as the Saracens did, but put an end to the Eastern Roman Empire. For [third] is a character of the Roman Empire, as I have already noted. Which accordingly came to pass at the taking of Constanti∣nople, and swallowing thereupon the whole Roman Empire in the East.

16. And the number of the army of the horse∣men were two hundred thousand thousand, and I heard the number of them: whereby I understood how exceeding numerous they were; which is ano∣ther note of their being Turks, it being well known what vast Armies they bring into the field. And this number does not signifie Arithmetically, that is, precisely that number, but figuratively is put for a vast number in general, and so vast, that it could not be discovered by the eye, so well as signified by speech. And that there is no mention of Foot may be an allusion to their known name in Greek Histo∣rians, who usually call them Persians, which name signifies Horsemen: which is another note of their be∣ing Turks.

17. And thus I saw the Horses in vision, and them that sate on them having breast-plates of fire and Iacinth; of Iacinth, that is, of a blue co∣lour; and of Brimstone, by reason that when they shot off, the air betwixt them and the sight of the be∣holder seemed fiery at the flashing of the powder, and

then coloured with a blue smoke, and after filled his nostrils with the scent of sulphur; which shows, that this Vision * belongs to the times since the Invention of Gunpowder. And the heads of the horses were as the heads of Lions; not for their shapes, but for the roaring noise that seems to come from them at the riders discharging their Carbines or Pistols, as what follows plainly intimates. And out of their mouths issued fire, smoke and brimstone.

18. By these three was the third part of men killed; that is, the Roman Empire in the East was not only vexed and annoied, but utterly subdued, van∣quished and destroyed by these Centaures, as I may so call them, the Turks, who are called Persae in the Greek Historians from the Hebrew word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Paras, which signifies a man on horseback, including both the shapes in one Appellation, as if that Country bred such Monsters which are usually called Centaures: Which Centaures here are set out still more mon∣strously, as killing men by the fire, and by the smoke, and by the brimstone which issued out of their mouths; as it may seem at a distance when they let off their Fireguns and Pistols.

19. For their power is in their mouth and in their tails: As in the Scorpio-Locusts before, a monster made up of a Locust, and of a Scorpion, to signifie the Saracens: so here is a Monster made up of a Horse and a Man, a Centaure, as it were to signifie the Turks, and have tails whereby they are said to hurt men, signifying the same venome or mischief of Mahome∣tism. The power of these Centaures is in their mouths and in their tails, the Turks playing two parts, (viz.) of a Warriour in the field discharging fire and shot against the Enemy, and of a Religionist after the vi∣ctory,

all their War according to their Alchoran, be∣ing a kind of Holy War to propagate Mahometisme, and Paradise is promised to them that dye in the Cause; and therefore it is said, For their tails were like unto Serpents, and had heads, and mouths too, I warrant you, to speak and tempt the vanquish∣ed (as the Old Serpent did Eve) from their obedi∣ence to God and his Christ; (and so with them they do hurt) not only upon that false pretense, as if we Christians were guilty of Polytheisme, or of worship∣ping more gods than one, because we profess the Tri∣nity of the Godhead, but also upon a pretense then too lamentably true, because they had so wretchedly corrupted the Ancient Apostolick Christianity, with many intolerable Superstitions and gross Idolatries; adding the persecution of all those that would not submit to them and their wicked Inventions. For which gross degeneracy of the Church, this scourge of the Turks especially was sent in upon them, as is plainly implyed in what follows.

20. And the rest of the men which were not kil∣led by these plagues: that is, of the Scorpio-Locusts, and Euphratean Centaures, as I may so speak, but were only vexed with them; by which is plainly meant the Western part of the Roman Empire, which the Turk could never possess himself of yet as he has of the Eastern: Yet for all this sad Example of Gods severity for the like crimes this Western part of the Empire repented not of the works of their hands, their wicked and impious Inventions, whereby they corrupted the Ancient Apostolick Christianity, That they should not worship Devils, * 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the Original has it, that is, Demons, or middle invisible Powers betwixt God and Men, whether Angels or

Souls of men departed. And in reference to these Idols of gold, and silver, and brass, and stone, and of wood, which neither can see, nor hear, nor walk; and yet they lift up their eyes and hands to them, and pray before them, as if they could see their posture, hear what they said, and were able to go and bestir themselves to accomplish their requests: But in that the mode of their Idolatry here is by Sta∣tues not by Pictures, this is another insinuation that the Western Church is here understood.

21. Neither repented they of their murthers: that is, of their murtherous persecution of innocent Souls for not submitting to their Idolatrous Rites and Customs; nor of their sorceries, their imposturous exorcismes and enchantments of several things to holy pretended uses; nor of their fornication, their un∣natural uncleannesses of all sorts upon an Hypocritical profession of a single life; nor of their thefts, their cunning tricks of cheating the people of their mo∣ney, by setting up Images for them to bring Oblati∣ons to, their merchandises of hallowed Crosses, Beads, Medals, and the like trumperies and deceits. For such like wickednesses as these was the wrath of God pour∣ed down upon the Eastern part of the Empire, by letting loose the Euphratean Horsemen upon them, so as to quite over-run them and vanquish them; and yet the Western Church, the more the pity, did not lay it at all to heart, while those Judgments were thundring against the Eastern, and these Euphratean Horsemen were let loose upon them. Which happen∣ed a little before the year 1300, after the Caliphate of Bagdad, with which the first Wo expired, had in the year 1258 been abolished by the Tartars, and the Remainder of the Turks who had Reigned in Per∣sia

on the other side of Euphrates were cast out, as out of a sling into the parts of the Roman Empire on this side Euphrates by the said Tartars; namely, in the year 1289, who winning Syria and Palestine, and dividing amongst themselves the greater part of Asia minor, at last joyning in one Othoman Empire broke also into Europe, nor ceased till they took Con∣stantinople, and quite abolished the Constantinopoli∣tan Empire, and made themselves fully Masters there∣of.

But as for the close of this second Wo-trumpet, the most natural extent I discern thereof, is the Univer∣sal Impenitency of the Western parts of the Roman Empire, till some Country or Kingdom appeared con∣verted from such Crimes as the Eastern Empire was destroyed for by these Euphratean Horsemen. And so we shall clearly observe with what succession of the Churches this sixth Trumpet, or second Wo-Trum∣pet expires; namely, it ends with the Thyatirian suc∣cession. The six Trumpets added to the six Seals reach just so far and no further. So that the seventh Trumpet must be contemporary with the Sardian, Philadelphian and Laodicean successions, and equalize the succession of them all; which is worth the re∣membring for the better understanding what fol∣lows.

NOTES. CHAPTER IX. Vers. 1.

Fallen from Heaven to the Earth, &c. The Origi∣nal has it, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which though our English Translation renders, I saw a

Star fall from Heaven; as if it were 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, then falling; yet I have made bold to translate it according to Grammatical truth, fallen from Heaven. But I un∣derstand it of a fallen Angel, according to the warran∣table sense of the Cabbalists. See my Synopsis Prophe∣tica, Book 1. ch. 8. sect. 14.

Vers. 5. The nature of the Scorpion perpetually to attempt to sting, &c. Semper cauda in ictu est, nullo∣que momento meditari cessat, ne quando desit occasioni, Plin. Histor. Natur. lib. 11. c. 25. Her taile is alwayes a striking, nor ceases she any one moment to endea∣vour to sting, that she may be sure to miss no oppor∣tunity.

Vers. 14. Four Turkish Sultanies or Tetrarchies, &c. These four Sultanies, their number is learnedly and ingeniously made out by M^r J. Mede on this Text: But besides this, if they were not just four, (and the busi∣ness is not their Number but their Office, what they are to do and when) yet by a Prophetick Diorisme they might be called four, Four standing for a note of Vni∣versality in the Cabbalistick Mysteries. And D^r Ham∣mond on this place would have Four not to signifie just four, but indefinitely to be put for the number of the An∣gels concerned in this affair: Which he might the better have adventured on, if he had been acquainted with the Cabbalistick stile.

Vers. 17. Belongs to the times since the Invention of Gunpowder, and the use of Guns in War; Which Berchtoldus Niger a Franciscan Monk and Alchymist is said first to have divulged to the world about the year 1380, which was after the plague of the Saracens upon the Empire: And shews also, how vain the attempts of those are who would draw back these Visions to the times of Titus, and the besieging of Jerusalem by the Roman Armies.

Vers. 20. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the Original has it, &c. And this 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 has the same signification that 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which signifies Spirits, whether the Souls of Men or An∣gels, and that either good or bad. This is certainly the sense of the word in the Greek Language: And therefore it is not so justifiably and fitly translated here Devils; which none amongst the Pagans themselves are said to worship, unless Witches and Magicians: and therefore it had been more safe to have retained the Greek word, which also the Latines use, and called them Demons, which signifies as well goods Angels, and the souls of good men departed this life, as bad Angels or bad Souls, or if you will, Devils; which in all Idola∣trous worship are in all likelihood busie Assistants, and several times make a show of Miracles, and so attract the worship of Idolaters to themselves, they worshipping them that do these miraculous feats when any are done; so that the sense is easie enough either way. Not to add, that by a just reproach to their worshipping of Saints and Angels, they are said to worship Devils: For who but a Devil would receive Religious Worship? or at least to worship false Objects, according to that of Psalm 98. v. 5. All the Gods of the Heathen are 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which is the very word here in this verse: And the Hebrew word is 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 which is as much as 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 no gods, but vain objects of worship, called in Hebrew 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 in Greek 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, there being no true objects of worship, but he that made the Heavens: See my Synopsis Prophetica, Book 2. cap. 10. And M^r Mede's Apostasie of the latter Times, ch. 3, and 4

CHAPTER X.

THe Euphratean Horsemen having over-run and destroyed, and fully seized on the Eastern part of the Roman Empire, natural method will prompt us to expect that what follows in this Prophecy of the sealed Book, should refer to the Western parts of the Empire, and concern the highest Dominion there, to wit, the Bloody, Idolatrous, Papal Hierar∣chy, that Antichrist that exalts himself above all that is called God or worshipped; the Prophet Balaam Lord of the People, and who had made the Secular Power a Balak, an empty cypher or an Ahab, that is wholly guided or directed by the Prophetess Ieze∣bel: So that this Papal Hierarchy in the West, being in reality the Highest Power by Usurpation; and the Antichrist exalting himself against Christ, and a∣bove him; we may rationally expect, that the last Wo-trumpet which contains the residue of the Sealed-Book-Prophecy, carries in it such things or alterati∣ons as tend to the downfall of Antichrist, and resto∣ring and enlarging the Kingdom of Christ in these parts of the Roman Empire, and over the whole Earth. And therefore accordingly it is said:

• 1. And I saw another mighty Angel come down from Heaven, one distinct from the seven Trumpet-Angels, cloathed with a cloud; that is, clouds and darkness were round about him, a thick cloud char∣ged with thunder. And a Rain-bow was on his head; which betokens he came in the Glory of the Divinity, even in the Glory of God the Father, for the Rainbow in the Vision of Ezechiel so signifies. And therefore this mighty and victorious Angel must

• be Christ; and a further intimation hereof is from what follows; And his face was as it were the Sun: For so he appeared to Saul, when he cryed out to him, Saul, Saul, why persecutest thou me; and such was his description when he appeared in the midst of the seven golden candlesticks. And his feet as Pillars of fire, as it were coming out of the cloud and reaching to the Earth; which are tokens of the great wrath of the Son of God, or Christ, and his coming to judge and take vengeance of his Ene∣mies: His feet was as fine Brass in the Thyatirian In∣terval, here they are like a Pillar of fire.
• 2. And he had in his hand a little book open; which contains all the Visions of the Prophecy of the opened Book, as we at first noted: And he set his right foot on the sea, and his left foot on the earth, stand∣ing in that Majestick manner, and laying claim to, or seizing himself, as it were, on his right by Sea and Land: See ch. 12.9. ch. 13.11.
• 3. And cryed with a loud voice, as when a Lion roareth: which is another intimation, that it is Christ the Lion of the Tribe of Iudah. And who in this majestick posture, and terrible roaring could so well be said to set himself against Antichrist, or the Papal Hierarchy as Christ? The Roman Empire Eastern and Western too was sorely vext and scourged by the Scorpio-Locusts the Saracens, and Eastern quite de∣stroyed after by those Euphratean Centaures the Turks: But the Papal Empire or Hierarchy here in the West, Christ himself with his Apostolical Legions of Reform∣ed Christians will utterly demolish and destroy, as it is elsewhere said of the Ten Horns or Kings, that at last they shall hate the Whore, make her desolate, eat her flesh, and burn her with fire. This loud roaring

• therefore of this Lion of the Tribe of Iudah sets off, in general, the anger and victorious terrour of Christ in assaulting and overcoming the Kingdom of Anti∣christ, or the Papal Hierarchy, and glorious Erection of his own Kingdom. These in general are the af∣fairs of this last space of the Sealed-Book-Prophecy. And whereas it is said, when he cryed, or while he cryed, seven thunders uttered their voices; This is a distribution of the aforesaid space into seven parts, which will be very serviceable for the orderly dispo∣sing of the Visions of the Opened-Book-Prophecy. These seven Thunders may be seven Bath-Cols, that is, seven Oracles or Voices delivered in the midst of a Thunder; and the last Thunder, which betokens the turning of the Earth into a Lake of Fire by thunder∣ing and Lightning might happily send out some such voice as this: Go ye accursed into everlasting fire. This is the doom of them that adhere to the bloody, im∣posturous and Idolatrous Papal Hierarchy.
• 4. And when the seven thunders had uttered their voices, I was about to write, namely what they said: And I heard a voice from Heaven, say∣ing unto me, Seal up those things that the seven thunders uttered; with an allusion to this Sealed Book of Prophecies, as if he should say, Though the seventh Seal be opened, yet as to this part thereof, let it be as sealed again, for it is needless here so par∣ticularly to declare things touching the destruction of the Papal Hierarchy: which agrees very well with what follows, according to the reading of the Biblia Regia, Andreas and others. And thou shalt write them hereafter (not, And write them not) namely in the Opened-Book-Prophecies, where these affairs of the de∣struction of Antichrist, and of the advancement of

• Christs Kingdom shall be more fully and particularly delivered; which is a marvellous manner of transiti∣on from the Sealed-Book-Prophecy to the Opened-Book-Prophecy, and sutable to the usual majestickness of this Book of the Apocalypse.
• 5. And the Angel which I saw stand upon the sea and upon the earth lifted up his hand to hea∣ven, as using that usual Ceremony of posture in swear∣ing.
• 6. And sware by him that liveth for ever and ever, who created heaven and the things that there∣in are, and the earth and the things that therein are, and the sea and the things that are therein. This is a mighty and vehement asseveration, but it is concerning a thing that sunk flesh and blood are too too incredulous of, which makes Christ in his Epistle to the Church of the Laodicean Interval, which in∣cludes his coming to judgment, and his putting an end to the Scene of things here on Earth, use as ve∣hement asseveration as might be, by calling himself the Amen, the faithful and true Witness, and the begin∣ning of the Creation of God; and therefore he who could also put an end to it. And so here, there is the like vehement asseveration, that the stage of the Earth must have an end at the last Thunder, which will bring upon it the Conflagration. For so he saith, That there should be time no longer, that is, That there shall be here no more time upon Earth.
• 7. Saving in the dayes of the voice of the se∣venth Angel when he shall sound, and the mystery of God be finished, as he has declared to his ser∣vants the Prophets: that is, Those predictions be fulfilled which in such a mystical and symbolical stile God hath foretold by his Prophets Isaiah, Daniel and

• ... Ezechiel, and others, which reach to the very end of the world, or of the stage of things on this Earth. And this is the first part of this marvellous Transition from the Prophecy of the Sealed Book, to that of the Opened Book.
• 8. And the voice which I heard from Heaven, namely, at the beginning of the Sealed-Book-Prophe∣cy spake unto me again in the tone of a Trumpet, suppose as it did before: And said, Go and take the little Book which is open in the hand of the An∣gel, which standeth upon the Sea and upon the Earth: Namely, in the hand of Christ, now in the form of an Angel, as before in the form of a Lamb, but the same person still under another form, as it is the same Book, though opened now when sealed be∣fore: But this new change in both denotes a new se∣ries of Prophecies from the beginning of the Church to the end of the world, as those of the Sealed Book were.
• 9. And I went unto the Angel and said unto him, Give me the little Book: And he said unto me, Take it and eat it up, and it shall make thy belly bitter, but it shall be in thy mouth sweet as honey: that is, Though the knowledge of future things may be pleasant and tempting to the curious Reader of this Book, yet when he shall throughly di∣gest it or understand it, it will be bitter by reason of the several sad and bitter things contained in it. As the sad persecution of the Primitive Christians in the Smyrnean succession of the Church, and the foul A∣postasie of the Church into gross Idolatry under the Reign of Antichrist, or the Whore of Babylon, and the most barbarous persecutions of them that will not submit to her wicked and Idolatrous Tyranny. And

• there is bitterness enough for her too at the last, which makes her paramours so loth to understand this Book of Prophecies aright.
• 10. And I took the little Book out of the An∣gels hand and ate it up, and it was in my mouth sweet as honey; and as soon as I had eaten it, my belly was bitter: that is, my stomach was bit∣ter: which is a prefiguration of the condition of those that shall read this Book and rightly digest it, that is truly understand it: Though there be pleasure in the understanding it, yet when these sad things touching the Church were to come, it could not but be bitter∣ness to them; that is, the Book is of that nature that it would so affect a Christian.
• 11. And he said unto me, Thou must prophecy again: that is, Thou must run over again from the same Epocha of time, this race of prophecying, that is, foretell, (as before the fate or state of the Empire, so now) the fate or state of the Christian Church from the beginning thereof to the end of the world. Be∣fore many Peoples, and Nations, and Tongues, and Kings; that is, to their faces: so that they may all understand how they are concerned in this Pro∣phecy of the opened Book. And thus is the Transi∣tion from the Sealed-Book-Prophecy to the Opened-Book-Prophecy in both the parts thereof, fully finish∣ed. Now follow the Visions themselves of the Open∣ed-Book-Prophecy, and that in a sufficiently natural and rational order, those Visions that reach from the beginning of the Church being placed first.

NOTES. Chapter X. Vers. 7.

Saving in the dayes of the voice of the seventh An∣gel when he shall sound, &c. Instead of, But in the dayes, I have rendered it, Saving in the dayes, the sense of this verse in the Original, being exceeding im∣perfect and ungrammatical, unless 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 be supposed to be put for 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 or 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 saving or except. And that 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 signifies so sometimes, is abundantly plain out of se∣veral instances in the New Testament, Mat. 20.22. But to sit on my right hand and on my left is not mine to give, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, except to those for whom it is prepared of my Father. And Mat. 7.8. compared with Mark 9.8. where the former has it: And when they lift up their eyes, they saw no man 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, save Jesus only, the latter has it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. Where 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 is plainly put for 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, and our English Translation renders it, save Jesus only. These and other such like places has Gro∣tius himself noted to our hand, which makes it manifest that 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 sometimes signifies as much as 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, or 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, except or saving. And being the sense is maimed in this place of the Apocalypse, unless 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 be so rendred, it is plain that it is the sense of this particle here. And 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, I have rendred, when he shall sound, not when he shall begin to sound, as if it were re∣strained to the beginning of the sounding, because 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 implies no such thing. See my Ratio Synchronistica, cap. 2. sect. 3. Wherefore it is plain, that the Angel swears there shall be no more Time on Earth, saving in the space of the seventh Trumpet, and that therefore there will be

an end of this terrestrial Scene of things contrary to the confident conceit of those scoffing Atheists, 2 Peter 3.3. And moreover, that since we are at the end of all in this seventh Verse, that there is a beginning of a new series of Prophecies, from the first Epocha, afterwards.

CHAPTER XI.

1. ANd there was given to me a réed like un∣to a Rod, and the Angel stood saying, Rise and measure the Temple of God and the Altar, and those that worship therein: That is, all that space that is contained within the inward Court. In the first part whereof is the Temple which consists of the Sanctum, and Sanctum Sanctorum, and in the lat∣ter part thereof stands the Altar of Holocausts, which whole space therefore is Thysiasterion, or the place of sacrificing, and was not to be rendred Altar, but the place where the Altar stands. For the Priests did not worship in the Altar, but in the place where the Al∣tar was erected: Which place the Greek Text calls Thysiasterion. And in that it is said Measure them that worship therein, it is plain, that the measuring be∣longs to the men not to the place. This space there∣fore of ground answers to that space of time which is comprehended in the Ephesine and Smyrnean succes∣sion of the Church. And the correspondence is ad∣mirable betwixt the Smyrnean succession and the Thy∣siasterion, when so many Martyrs as so many Holo∣causts were sacrificed in testimony of the Truth of the Christian Religion, the space where the Altar of Ho∣locausts stands, falling in with the space of Time of the Smyrnean persecutions.

2. But the Court which is without the Tem∣ple leave out and measure it not. For it is not commensurable to the Rule of Gods Word, and the Apostolick Faith and Practice, but contrary or repug∣nant; namely, that time of the Church which is com∣prised in far the greatest part of the Pergamenian suc∣cession, and all the Thyatirian, in which they are said to offer things sacrificed to Idols, and were in some kind or other become Idolatrous, never go about therefore to measure them, for they are incommen∣surate to the Rule, and point-blank contrary thereto: such is the outward Court. For it is given unto the Gentiles, and the holy City shall they tread under foot forty and two months: that is, a kind of Paganochristianity instead of pure Christianity shall visibly domineer for forty and two months of years, that is 1260 years; which is the same proportion of Time to the commensurate Time of the Church un∣der the Ephesine and Smyrnean succession, and a little further, that the proportion of the outward Court has to the inward Court, which proportion is as 1260 to 360; that is, the outward Court contained the in∣ward three times and an half in quantity.

3. And I will give power unto my two Wit∣nesses, and they shall prophecy a thousand two hun∣dred and threescore dayes cloathed in sackcloth. The works of darkness were numbred by months, the Moon being Ruler of the night, but the works of Righteousness by dayes, of which the Sun is mo∣derator. But by dayes are understood Prophetick dayes here, that is, years, a thing known and usual in Prophecies. By these Two Witnesses are under∣stood all that bore witness against the Idolatries and disorders of this time of Apostasie, and they are said

to be cloathed in sackcloth, to denote both the sad∣ness of heart they are in, to see such times, and also to signifie the low and mean condition of such Holy and Apostolick men in this wicked time of Apostasie. But all these mournful Witnesses are said to be two, though never so many, partly by reason of the Types in the Old Testament to which they allude, Moses and Aaron, Elias and Elisha, Zorobabel and Ieshuah who show'd their Zeal for the purity of Gods Worship a∣gainst the Idolatry in the Wilderness, in the Baalitish Idolatry, and in the Captivity of Babylon. There may be also an allusion to things in this Division into two, (viz.) to Magistracy and Ministry, to the Old Testament and the New, or else to the People of the Iews, such as are kept out from our Religion by the gross Adulterations of it, and to the Virgin Company of Christians.

4. Those are the two Olive Trées and the two Candlesticks standing before the God of the Earth. A description of the two Witnesses in the sense above declared, with a particular allusion to that in Zachary chap. 4.11. where by the two Olive Trees upon the right side of the Candlestick and the left is under∣stood Zorobabel and Ieshuah, those faithful Servants in the Babylonish Captivity, and the time of the mourn∣full Witnesses is the very time of the Whore of Ba∣bylon.

5. And if any man will hurt them, fire proceed∣eth out of their mouth, and devoureth their Ene∣mies: The allusion is to Moses and Elias, who did really bring down fire upon their Enemies; but here it is to be understood Mystically of the fire of the Spi∣rit: Not by might nor by power, but by my Spirit saith the Lord of Hosts: It was the Word of the Lord to

Zorobabel, who was a Type of these Witnesses, and an helper of Gods People in the Babylonish Captivity: And it is said of the Man in Esdras coming out of the Sea,* 1.8 And he shall destroy them without labour, by the Law which is like unto fire. In which sense I would understand that which followes: And if any man will hurt them, he must in this manner be killed by the power of the Spirit in conviction and prayer; these are the weapons of their warfare.

6. These have power to shut heaven that it rain not in the dayes of their Prophecies: namely, in the dayes of their mournful Prophecy, their prophe∣cying in sackcloth. This is figuratively spoken by a Prophetical Metalepsis or Zoopoeia of the second kind, attributing that to their activity, or it may be oral denunciation, which is only a consequence of their condition, they being put out of power and place in Church and State. The allusion is to Elias his hindering it from raining three years and six months in Ahab's time, which time exactly answers to 1260 dayes the time of these mournfull Witnesses. But the rain that is here hindred is the sound Aposto∣lick Doctrine, and Heavenly influence thereof, which hinderance is a consequence of these mournfull Wit∣nesses being put out of power and place. And have power over waters to turn them to blood; be∣cause their Apostolick preaching of the Gospel of meekness and peace does not take place. And to smite the earth with all plagues as often as they will; that is, as often as occasions offer themselves: * For particular occasions answer in analogie to parti∣cular acts of will in this Prophetick Zoopoeia; and in∣deed all the ten plagues of Aegypt came upon the Ro∣man Empire, because these Witnesses to the Aposto∣lick

Truth are not heard, it having become a Land of Aegypt to the true Israelites, the pure and Apostolick Christians. * 1.9 How the plague of Frogs, of Lice, of swarms of Gnats and Flyes, murrain of Beasts, Boyles and Ulcers, Hail and Locusts, in a mystical sense in∣terpreted fell upon this mystical Aegypt, as it is cal∣led in this Book of Prophecies, as a necessary conse∣quence of these Witnesses disgrace, affliction and de∣privation of power and office, were easie here to show, if it were not too long for this short Explication we are upon.

7. And when they shall be * a finishing their Testimony; that is, performing their witnessing to the Truth against all the Impostures and Idolatries of this Spiritual Aegypt. The Beast that ascendeth out of the bottomless pit: that is, either out of a pit of the Earth or the abysse of the Sea, and so it will sig∣nifie either the two-horned or the ten-horned Beast: shall make war against them, and shall overcome them, and kill them; shall oppose them and over∣come, as to the power of this world, and kill them; so that they shall be politically dead all of them, and some, as it happened to the Waldenses and Albigenses and others, be slain in a natural sense: So that the meaning in short is this, That no sooner shall they begin to perform their office of witnessing to the Truth, but they shall be assaulted, suppressed, kept out of power, and politically killed, as their Resurre∣ction also is Political, as you shall hear anon.

8. And their dead bodies shall lye in the stréet of the great City, which spiritually is called So∣dom and Egypt, where also our Lord was cruci∣fied: that is to say, These Witnesses as to any Poli∣tical power and life being dead karcasses (as it is said

of the people of the Jews in a political sense, shall these dry bones live!) shall be in being still (though in this Political death) in the large Jurisdiction of that great City, which is spiritually or mystically called Sodom and Aegypt, and the City where our Lord was crucified, that is, Ierusalem that killeth the Prophets, that far extended Idolatrous Church, that for their uncleannesses upon their pretense of vowed Celibate is here called Sodom: Aegypt for the slavery they keep the people of God in, which agrees well with the plagues of Aegypt abovementioned, and the Old Ierusalem for persecuting the true Prophets and Ser∣vants of God, that is, the true professors of the Apo∣stolick Christianity.

9. And they of the People, and Kindreds, and Tongues, and Nations shall sée their dead bodies, thus devoid of all Political life and power, thrée days and an half; that is, for three Times and an half, Day signifying the same that Time in some cases, and here it is said. Three dayes and an half, for decorum sake, that in the out-side of the letter they may not seem to prophesie and be dead at the same time, nor lye too long unburied or unrevived. But these three times and an half, or a time and times and half a time, is the same that three years and an half prophetically understood, or 1260 years, which is the time of the Political death of these Witnesses, and of their pro∣phecying in sackcloth. And whereas it is said, And shall not suffer their dead bodies to be put in graves; that implies that they are kept safe in be∣ing, though kept out of all Power, and so politically dead.

10. And they that dwell on the Earth shall re∣joyce over them, and make merry: that is, they

whose hearts and minds dwell upon earthly things, these will rejoyce when the two Witnesses are slain, their free rebukes out of the Word of God being very disquieting and tormenting to these worldly and car∣nally minded men. And they shall send gifts one to another, and more jollily and freely congratulate one another the enjoyment of their Honours and Church-preferments shared amongst them, because these two Prophets tormented them that dwell on the earth: but could now do so no more, they be∣ing put out of place and power. These two true and faithful Prophets are slain in this sense, who torment∣ed them whose minds were set upon the Earth, that is, savoured nothing but earthly things.

11. And after thrée dayes and an half; that is, after a time and times and half a time was now cur∣rant; that is, in the last Semitime, the spirit of life from God entered into them; that is, Divine Pro∣vidence so brought it about, that they began to have some Political Power, and Favour, and Interest with the Great Ones. And they stood upon their feet; they stood on their own legs, and they were coun∣tenanced and supported even for the very profession sake of the pure and Apostolick Faith, in opposition to that Paganochristianity and new-coined Idolatry that had got into the Church; and great fear fell upon them which saw them, suspecting what might be the issue thereof.

12. And they heard a great voice from Heaven saying unto them, Come up hither: There was a powerfull command from the Political Heaven, in which Political Suns and Moons, and Stars, Kings, Princes and Governours shine; there was, I say, an express and effectual Command from these Higher

Powers, that the more pure and Apostolick Religion should be established, and that Idolatrous and Paga∣nochristian superstition, that so long domineering and persecutive Papal Hierarchy should be abolished, and the long persecuted profession of the Apostolick Faith and Practice be advanced to the highest degrees and dignities whether Ecclesiastical or Civil. For it is said, And they ascended up to Heaven in a cloud: Their riding thus in a cloud is an emblem of rising into Ho∣nour and Power, and that they were to be employ∣ed in the highest offices and places whether in Church or State. And their enemies beheld them; and you may be sure with a malicious and envious eye.

13. And the same hour was there a great earth∣quake: A mighty change and commotion in affairs: And the tenth part, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, of the City fell: that is, Tithes, the holy Revenue of the City, that Papal Hierarchy, or Idolatrous Roman Clergy fell, was shaken off from them; and as to their any lon∣ger enjoying of them lost. And in this earthquake were slain seven thousand names of men: that is, Politically slain, as the Witnesses resurrection to life is Political. But neither seven nor thousand signifie here Arithmetically but Symbolically: And they are called Names of men rather than Men, denoting that they are Titles, Dignities, Offices or Orders of Men belonging to the State of Christendome under the se∣venth head of the Beast: which Apoc. cap. 17. is an Idolatrous Head, and Antichristian; and therefore shews their Nature to be Idolatrous and Antichri∣stian: And they are said to be slain as ceasing to be in that Power they were before. But this seven is multiplyed into a thousand to show what a solid overthrow this Hierarchy had, and for adorning the

outside of the Vision. And the remnant were af∣frighted, and gave glory to the God of Heaven. When so great a part of the Roman Hierarchy had fallen in the late blessed Reformation, it is no won∣der if the rest of that party were affrighted and sur∣prized, they sitting before as a Queen in the Thyati∣rian Interval, which thought she should find no sor∣row. But now they could not but acknowledge the hand of God was upon them, and understand that the God of Heaven, or the most high God ruleth in the Kingdoms of men.

14. The second Wo is past: (viz.) In the resur∣rection of the Witnesses, or the late blessed Refor∣mation. And that general Impenitency in this We∣stern part of the Empire is now expired with this se∣cond Wo, so many parts thereof ceasing to worship Demons and Idols of Gold and Silver, &c. And here likewise the Thyatirian succession expires, and Ieze∣bel the false Prophetess, the Roman Hierarchy is no longer permitted to seduce the people to commit for∣nication, and eat things sacrificed to Idols, and that promise to the Church in Thyatira is fulfilled. He that overcometh and keepeth my works to the end, to him will I give Power over the Nations or Gentiles, those that had trod down the outward Court to the latter part of the last semitime of the seven, which are equal to the forty two months, wherein they are said to have trod it down: So that the residue of this Vi∣sion runs up into the Sardian succession of the Church, into the time of the seven Vials. And already I think it is manifest in this Opened-Book-Prophecy, that this Lion of the Tribe of Iudah did not roar in vain, he having rescued so considerable a prey out of the jaws of Antichrist in the last notable Reformation. And

behold the third Wo cometh quickly, which is the pouring forth of the Vials. The first whereof is that intoxicating cup of envy, rage and exulceration of spirit against the risen Witnesses, by which their ene∣mies being dementated, it would make them impo∣tently attempt such things as would render them ex∣ecrable, odious or despicable to all the world. Which wrath of theirs, and malice so naturally flowing from the prosperity of the Witnesses, it is no wonder it is said, That the third Wo cometh quickly.

15. And the seventh Angel sounded, and there were great voices in Heaven, namely where S^t Iohn was wrapt up in Spirit, Saying, The Kingdoms of this world are become the Kingdoms of our Lord and his Christ; that is, several Kingdoms and Prin∣cipalities, as pledges of the rest, are recovered alrea∣dy by Christ out of the hands of the Tyrannical An∣tichrist by the late blessed Reformation. And he shall reign for ever and ever; that is, whatever chastisements may come upon the Church of Sardis for her neglects and imperfections, this Kingdom of Christ which has begun shall for certain take place, and he shall reign to the end of the world through the Sardian, Philadelphian and Laodicean succes∣sions.

16. And the four and twenty Elders which sate before God on their seats, fell upon their faces and worshipped God. These Princes in Heaven are said thus to do, betokening what those Princes and Po∣tentates on Earth, that were our Noble Reformers, would do, or how devoutly they would be affected for so blessed a Reformation, which God by his gra∣cious Providence had brought to pass, for they were in a manner slaves to the Pope before.

17. Saying, We give the thanks O Lord God Almighty, which art, and wast, and art to come; because thou hast taken to thee thy great power, and hast reigned: that is, given so glorious a speci∣men of thy power, and that thou rulest in the King∣doms of men, and hast thus happily begun the reign of thy Christ for the subduing utterly at last the King∣dom of Antichrist. The beginning of the seventh Trumpet is the beginning of the Sardian succession of the Church, and of the seven Vials; and the com∣mencement of them all are with praises and acclama∣tions for this first auspicious victory of Christ over the Papal Hierarchy or Antichrist. For the word Sardis signifies a Song of Ioy, and here is the thanks∣giving of the Elders, and at the beginning of the Vi∣als there is sung the Song of Moses, and of the Lamb. What follows here are some scatterings and obscure hints of the affairs under the seven Vials, and plainly ends with the seventh.

18. And the Nations were angry; that is, the Gentiles that had trodden down the outward Court, and defiled it by a new kind of Idolatrous Genti∣lism; the minds of these were exasperated and exul∣cerated with wrath and envy at this sudden resurre∣ction of the Witnesses, which is a short glance at the first Vial. And thy wrath is come, and the time of the dead; that is, of those that this Tyrannical Ro∣man Hierarchy had so often and in such multitudes so barbarously murthered for their witnessing to the Truth, the time is now come that Christ is to judge and revenge their Cause, which seems to allude to the third Vial, where it is said, Thou art righteous O Lord, which art, and wast, and shall be, because thou hast judg∣ed thus: For they have shed the blood of Saints and

Prophets, and thou hast given them blood to drink, for they are worthy, which is an easie comment upon what follows. That they should be judged, and that thou shouldest give reward unto thy Servants the Pro∣phets, and to thy Saints, and them that fear thy Name small and great. The meanest that have died Martyrs and been murdered for the profession of the Truth, that thou shouldest judge their Cause, though they were despised by this Proud, Imperious Iezebel: And shouldest destroy them that destroy the Earth: that is, the men upon the Earth, for of this Iezebel or Whore of Babylon it is said, And in her was found the blood of Prophets and of Saints, and of all that were slain upon the Earth; into such an Akel∣dama has that lofty Prelate the Pope ever and anon turned Christendom by his restless ambition and ty∣ranny.

19. And the Temple of God was opened in Hea∣ven: Out of which the seven Angels having the se∣ven last plagues are seen to come, Chap. 15. And there was seen in his Temple the Ark of the Te∣stament: Which answers to the great voice out of the Temple of Heaven from the Throne, Chap. 16.17. under the seventh Vial: So that this time reaches to the very Sanctum sanctorum, or Holy of holies, betoken∣ing a most powerfull, pure and Apostolick State of the Church, as if we were come into the first Apostolick Times again in the beginning of the Church, as the outward Court is an emblem of the latter Apostated Times thereof. By which is notified the beginning of the Philadelphian succession, which commences with the seventh Vial. To which what follows seems to allude. And there were lightnings, and voices, and thunderings, and an earthquake, and great

hail: which is plainly a description of the seventh Vial. So that this whole Vision in this Chapter be∣gins with the first Epocha of the Church, and endeth with the seventh Vial or first Thunder. Which is also the very space of the Sett of Visions comprized in the three following Chapters; which are a more ample description of the same state of things in the same time, and we shall note what parts answer each o∣ther.

NOTES. Chapter XI. Vers. 6.

By a Prophetical Metalepsis or Zoopoeia, &c. Meta∣lepsis is a Figure, whereby an effect or event is transla∣ted or communicated to some Person or Thing, because the Place and Time is coincident with them. That there is such a Figure, and that it is made use of in the Apo∣calypse I have proved in my Synopsis Prophetica, lib. 1. cap. 4. sect. 10. But a Zoopoeia of the second kind is, when free Actions are attributed to free Agents, of which notwithstanding they may be no more the cause than if they were inanimate Beings, or not in Being at all. This figure also I have proved to be made use of in the Apocalypse, as well as in other Authors, lib. 1. cap. 3. sect. 10. See my Synopsis in the places cited.

For particular occasions answer in Analogy to par∣ticular acts of will, &c. And the Analogie is very ex∣act, the Figure being but once admitted which I have demonstrated in my Synopsis Prophetica. Nor can any man wonder that the Apocalypse affects such high figures as these are, if he consider that this is one part of the artifice of Concealment, which is so studiously intended

in it. But if we understand this power given to these Witnesses of the oral denunciation of these Aegyptian plagues, that also is very plausible from Jer. 1.10. where God speaks thus to Jeremiah: See, I have this day set thee over the Nations and over the Kingdoms, to root out, and to pull down, and to destroy, and to throw down, and to build, and to plant: Which is not to do these things, but to denounce them.

CHAPTER XII.

1. ANd there appeared a great wonder in Hea∣ven, a Woman cloathed with the Sun, and the Moon under her féet, and upon her head a Crown of twelve Stars. This is the primitive A∣postolick Church before the Apostasie. Where being clothed with the Sun signifies her being environed with the pure Light of the Gospel, or the Sun of Righteousness communicated to her. And her being crowned with twelve Stars denotes, that it was her Glory, and her Crown, that she was not yet degene∣rated from the True Apostolick Faith and practice, nor did as yet either Iudaize or Paganize, but trod un∣der-foot both the Carnality of the Judaical Rites, (whose Feasts, and Legal Observances were appoint∣ed according to the course of the Moon) and also the gross Superstitions and Idolatries of the Pagans, which are rightly deemed the works of darkness, or of the night, of which the Moon is Governess.

2. And she being with Child cryed travailing in birth, and pained to be delivered. These sharp throes signifie the cruel cutting persecutions the Pri∣mitive Church was under, and the many martyrdoms

they did suffer before that promise of Christ was made good to them, Fear not little stock, for it is my Fathers good pleasure to give you the Kingdom. This state therefore of the Church is contemporary with that of the earnest Ephesine and bitter Smyrnean succession, and with the inward Court, where also stood the Altar of Holocausts, betokening the Primi∣tive Christians frequent sacrificing their lives in Te∣stimony to the Truth.

3. And there appeared another wonder in Hea∣ven; namely, while this Woman was thus in travail; And behold a great red Dragon, that is, bloody and cruel, having seven Heads and ten Horns; on his seventh head suppose, but without Crowns, to inti∣mate they are not yet in being, though the heads be said to be crowned as well the five past, and that one to come, as the present sixth head, the better to un∣derstand thereby, that they are Men or Magistrates, not Hills that are intimated in this place, that is the reason it is said, And seven Crowns upon his heads.

4. And his tail drew the third part of the stars of Heaven, and did cast them to the Earth; that is, his Military Train or Armies had subdued in S^t Iohn's time, the third part of the Kingdoms and Prin∣cipalities of the then known world. And the Dra∣gon stood before the Woman which was ready to be delivered to devour the Child as soon as it was born. The Dragon, that is, the Roman Empire Pa∣gan, known by its seven Heads, which allude also to the seven Hills, Chap. 17. as well as to the sevenfold succession of Government in it, but Pagan in that it is in the shape of a Dragon, as being under the Domi∣nion not of Christ but Satan, and also because seven

Heads are only named, and the Horns of the seventh Head yet uncrowned: Wherefore this Vision belongs to the Empire while it was yet purely Pagan, and the sense of that last clause is briefly this, That the Roman Pagan Emperours and their Ministers, the Devil as∣sisting, watched as close as they could, that the Church of Christ never should come to such Power as to have an Emperour of their own Religion, and so the Ro∣man Empire come into their hands; but so soon as any such thing appeared, they endeavoured to quash it and defeat it.

5. And she brought forth a Man-child who was to rule all Nations with a rod of Iron. But not∣withstanding all their envious and malicious watch∣fulness the Woman brought forth a Man-child, a My∣stical Christ, or Christian People, that at last would make themselves Masters of the Empire, and Rule the wicked persecutive Pagans with such severity as they deserved, which is intimated by what follows: And her Child was caught up unto God and to his Throne. He was advanced to the Imperial Dignity, which is called here the Throne of God, in such a sense as Supreme Magistrates are called Elohim, Gods, in the Hebrew Idiom, because they are Gods Vicege∣rents and Representatives here on Earth, whence their Majesty is also called Sacred. And this was plainly fulfilled when Constantine turned Christian. The watchfulness therefore of this 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, this quick-sighted vigilant Dragon seems to be contemporary with the Travail of the Woman till she had brought forth a Man-child that might rule all Nations with a Rod of Iron.

6. And the Woman fled into the Wilderness: But a little after this external prosperity of the Church,

and deliverance from the present Pagan persecution, she was yet fain to take shelter in the wilderness, the outward Catholick Church becoming little better in a short time: For which reason she is said to fly in∣to the Wilderness, being more safe in this Christiano-gentilism, than in that open furious oppression of the Pagan red Dragon, thought in propriety of speech the desart or Christiano-paganism came swiftly upon her rather than she by any will of her own fled into it, but it is a Prophetical Hypallage: Where she hath a place prepared of God that they should feed her there: The Apostolick Church should be preserved by Gods Providence all the time of this her abode in the Wilderness or Christiano-gentilism, namely about the time of a thousand two hundred and threescore dayes, Prophetical, that is years: Or the time and times and half a time, as they are afterward called, and sometimes resolved into Dayes, sometimes into Months, for * particular symbolical meanings, and for the embellishing of the Cortex of the Apocalypse, but to be understood alwayes seven Semitimes in what∣ever other disguise expressed, whether of Dayes or Months: These 1260 dayes therefore is the same time with forty two months, of the treading down the out∣ward Court by the Gentiles.

7. And there was war in Heaven; which beto∣kens the like affair to come upon Earth: Michael and his Angels fought against the Dragon, and the Dragon fought and his Angels: which implies the invisible assistances and oppositions of Angels good and bad, the one on the Primitive Christians side, the other on the Pagan Empires side, during that strong conflict betwixt the Church and the Pagans their per∣secutors in the Ephesine and Smyrnean succession, with

which the pangs of the Woman in travail also is con∣temporary.

8. And the Dragon and his Angels prevailed not; that is, they were quite vanquished, neither was their place found any more in Heaven.

9. And the great Dragon was cast out, that old Serpent, with whom Christ had had no small com∣bating long before, called the Devil and Satan; the reproacher and opposer of the Kingdom of Christ in all places and ages; which deceiveth the whole world, and seduceth them into false and idolatrous worship. He was cast out into the earth, and his Angels were cast out with him: This appearance thus in Heaven signified the destruction of the Em∣pire as Draconick and Idolatrous, that none of that foul stamp should be in high places of the Empire, but such as were professed Christians.

10. And I heard a loud voice saying in Hea∣ven, Now is come salvation, and strength, and the Kingdom of our God, and the power of his Christ. This is contemporary to the affairs of the sixth Seal, or rather with the close thereof, and the com∣mencement of the Pergamenian Interval. For the ac∣cuser of our brethren is cast down, which accused them before God day and night. What the Devil is said to do concerning Iob, accuse him before God, the Pagans are here understood to do before the Em∣perour and other Magistrates of the Empire, to raise most wicked calumnies concerning the Christians, ob∣jecting against them Thyaestean Suppers, Incests, Adul∣tery, promiscuous Lusts, Murders, Conspiracies against Princes, Plagues, Famine, Mischiefs by Fire, or what other calamity happened in the Empire.

11. And they overcame him by the blood of the Lamb, through the merits of Christ crucified on the Cross, and by the word of their Testimony, and spending their own blood also in way of Martyrdom, For it is said, And they loved not their lives unto the death. This Verse makes it plain, that the Battel that is said to be in Heaven, denotes a Battel here on Earth betwixt the Christians and their Persecutors.

12. Therefore rejoyce ye Heavens, and ye that dwell in them. Ye Angels and Holy Martyrs, not without an intimation also to the Political Heaven, in the Roman Empire to those in high Places and Offices under the Christian Emperour. Wo to the Inhabi∣tants of the Earth and of the Sea, that is, to the lower multitude: For the Devil is come down un∣to you having great wrath, and will stickle to do as much mischief as he can amongst you, while he may, because he knoweth that he hath but a short time: For though the Great Ones of the Empire were turn∣ed Christians, yet many of the Common People were still Pagans, wherefore the Devil will find out a fetch to strengthen those in their Paganism, and dissettle the other in their Christian Profession.

13. And when the Dragon saw that he was cast unto the Earth, and reduced to such a low, base condition: He persecuted the Woman which brought forth the Man-child: An envious, revenge∣full, persecuting temper rose in him against her.

14. And to the Woman were given two wings of a great Eagle: that is, by reason of the Roman Empire becoming Christian (and now divided into two parts, Eastern and Western (and that the Eagle is the Ensign of the Roman Empire is notorious enough) which these wings might represent) she was

in such a state, that by a Prophetick Hypallage it might be said of her, That she might fly into the Wilderness into her place: that is, the wilderness condition of the Church would come shortly upon her, wherein she should by Divine Providence be ever safe from the red Pagan, persecuting, Dragon, as it follows, where she is nourished for a time and times and half a time from the face of the Ser∣pent: That is, for three Prophetick years and an half, which is seven Prophetical half years, or semi∣times, which are the measures intended, as seems to be insinuated, by expressing the one thousand two hundred and sixty days, vers. 6. by a Time and Times and half a Time.

15. But before the commencement of the Time, as if he had a mind to overwhelm her before she could reach the appointed place, it is said, And the Ser∣pent cast out of his mouth water as a stood after the Woman: that is, the water of Heresie and Con∣tention, that sore division of the Church by reason of that Heresie of Arianisme, That he might cause her to be carried a way of the Flood: That the Church which stood out the hottest persecutions with invin∣cible valour against the red Dragon may now perish by the over-speading of Heresie and Intestine Divisi∣on, this furious controversie hardening the hearts of the unconverted people, and staggering the convert∣ed in their Faith and Profession.

16. And the Earth helped the Woman, and the Earth opened her mouth and swallowed up the flood which the Dragon cast out of his mouth: that is, the Church was delivered from this overflowing Heresie and Dissension by the Decree of an Oecume∣nical Council, (viz.) the first Nicene Council; their

opening their mouth in a Decree against Arianisme, and condemning it for an Heresie, was like the open∣ing of the mouth of the Earth to a flood that pre∣sently sinks and never is seen any more. Partly this real Analogie is alluded to, and partly there may be an allusion to the title Oecumenical, which is from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which implies in it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the Earth. For such gentle touches and glances at the signification of words are not unusual in the Prophetick stile.

17. And the Dragon was wroth with the Wo∣man, and went to make war with the remnant of her Séed which kéep the Commandments of God. The former wicked project failing, the wrath of the Dragon was again incensed against the Woman, (viz.) the Woman with the Crown of twelve Stars on her head, and the Moon under her feet, the pure Aposto∣lick Church, and went to make war with the rem∣nant of her Seed, those namely that she was to bring forth, while she abides in the Wilderness, which will approve themselves her genuine Off-spring by keep∣ing the Commandments of God, who forbids us ma∣king any graven Image to bow down to it or wor∣ship it, and bids us worship, serve, and pray to him∣self alone. And have the Testimony of Iesus Christ. For the Testimony of Jesus is the spirit of Prophecy, in which sense the two Witnesses are said to prophecy as well as to witness. The Testimony therefore of Je∣sus is to witness to the Gospel of our Lord Jesus Christ, not from mere custom or education, because others have told us it is true; but because we are assured of the truth thereof from the spirit of God, and in virtue of the spirit of life in the new birth. From this living Principle do these faithful Servants of Christ bear wit∣ness of the truth of his Word revealed in the Gospel,

and witness against the wicked inventions of an Apo∣statized Church, and loath them and detest them. For they are not dead vessels that will receive whole∣some liquor and poyson alike, but the Living Creati∣on of God: and therefore have an antipathy against all the works of the Devil, gross Superstition, Impo∣sture, Idolatry, Cuelty, lying Impossibilities, instead of true Miracles or Mysteries, and what other Inven∣tions of the Old Serpent that seduceth the whole world. Against such Witnesses therefore you may be sure this Dragon will make war, who in this Chapter is described under one single Figure of a Red Dra∣gon, the Roman Pagan Emperours being Pontifices Maximi, as well as Caesars. In the following Chap∣ter this Draconical power is divided into two, there being now such a state in the Roman Empire, as that there may be said to be Imperium in Imperio, the Pa∣pal or Sacerdotal Hierarchy distinct from the Caesa∣rean Majesty and Power.

NOTES. CHAPTER XII. Vers. 6.

For particular symbolical meanings, and for the embelishing of the Cortex of the Apocalypse, &c. This symbolical meaning, as I remember M^r Mede takes notice of. That the Time and Times and half a Time is expressed by one thousand two hundred and sixty days, when the time or continuance of the Children of Light, or of the Day is notified; but by forty two months, when the Children of Darkness or of the Night their continu∣ance is signified. Thus the continuance of the Ten-horn∣ed Beast, Chap. 13. is numbred by months; as also the

treading down the Outward Court by the Gentiles, Chap. 11. But the Womans stay in the Wilderness is expressed by Dayes, as also the time of the two Witnesses prophe∣cying in sackcloth. And it is manifest that the outward letter or cortex of the Apocalypse is better adorned this way, than if where ever we find forty two months, or one thousand two hundred and sixty dayes, a Time and Times and half a Time had been repeated. But these reasons of varying the phrase thus being so apparent (to say nothing of the use of turning Daniel's Time and Times and half a Time into forty two months, or one thousand two hundred and sixty dayes, for the more cer∣tainly understanding that three Prophetick years and an half is meant thereby) we may be the better assured, that no greater accurateness of Time is intended by them, than if the phrase of a Time and Times and half a Time had been alwayes used. The not understanding of which has made sundry in vain attempt to predict events foretold in the Apocalypse to the accurateness of a Prophetical Day, whenas indeed there is no use of either Prophetical Day or Month, unless in saying, such a thing was to fall out, or did fall out in such a Day, or such a Month, or such a day of such a Month of, suppose, the seventh or last Semitime or Prophetical half year, which consists of one hundred and eighty dayes or six months. And the nature of the things foretold are such, that they are not to terminate on a year, but rather require that grosser numbring by Semitimes. But the several particulars of the completion of a Prophecy, suppose of the rising of the Witnesses, might be more distinctly declared by saying this part was, suppose, in such a month of the last semitime, and such in such, in the fourth month suppose of the se∣venth or last semitime, or Prophetical half year, and such a day of that month, &c.

CHAPTER XIII.

1. ANd I stood upon the sand of the Sea, that is, me thought I stood by the Sea side; or rather as the vulgar Latine reads it, (which not only M^r Mede, but Cornelius à Lapide and Alcazar, and, as they say, the generality of Interpreters follow) And he stood upon the sand of the Sea, that is, The Dragon stood, &c. And I saw a Beast rise up out of the Sea, having seven heads and ten Horns; which betoken the Roman Empire, and upon his Horns ten Crowns. In the former Vision there were no Crowns upon his Horns, but here there are, to de∣note that this is the Roman Empire divided into many Kingdoms, (viz.) that the Vision reaches unto these times, or belongs to the times of this state of the Em∣pire, which Division of the Empire happened betwixt four and five hundred years after Christ. And upon his heads the name of Blasphemy, that is, of Ido∣latry; which signifies to us, that this Figure repre∣sents the Empire only under that succession of Time, that it was more or less Idolatrous.

2. And the Beast which I saw was like unto a Leopard; that is, it was like a Kingdom divided in∣to many parts, as the Greek Kingdom was. And his feet, that is, his forepart, which are as the Arms and Hands of the Bear, which are his strength and instru∣ment of action to raven and prey with; these were as the feet of a Bear: Which denotes the likeness of it with the Persian Kingdom, who as they were governed by their Magi in their affairs, so these by the Papal Hierarchy, by the Power and Counsel of the Pope and his Clergy. And his mouth as the

mouth of a Lion; that is, It is like the Babylonish Kingdom in its cruel Decrees against such as will not obey their Idolatrous Edicts, nor worship the Golden Image that Nebuchadnezzar had set up. Their stub∣bornness must be punished by an hot fiery furnace, Fire and Fagot must be prepared for them that will not submit to this New Roman Idolatry. And the Dragon gave him his Power, his Seat and great Authority. His power here according to the Origi∣nal should be his Forces or Armies: And what are the Forces and Armies of the Dragon, but his Evil Angels or wicked Spirits, and their Weapons and Ar∣tillery the external pomp of Images or Idols, and such gross furniture of their worship, whereby they over∣come and captivate the feeble phancies of the people? But his Seat and great Authority is the Imperial Crown and Authority: Which showes, that this Imperial Power as Idolatrous, is the genuine successour to the Pagan Imperial Power.

3. And I saw one of his heads as it were wounded to death: namely, in the fight of the Dra∣gon with Michael and the Holy Martyrs who were conquerours at last, and converted the Roman Pagan Empire to Christianity. And his deadly wound was healed; that is, the Roman Empire for that succes∣sion of Time it was represented to me under, was re∣covered unto its former Pagan-like and Idolatrous plight and condition. This Panther-like Beast, who by reason of the beauty of his skin, and sweetness of his scent allures other Beasts to him, and whom the Dragon is said most chiefly to fly from, under this fair show, and yet with the assistances of the Dragon was easily reduced to the former Pagan-like state, un∣der pretense of Christianity they imposing the old Pa∣ganick

Idolatries upon the People. And all the world wondred after the Beast: that is, they were all mightily taken with the Beast, he both gratifying them with his outward specious show of Christianity, that seemed so contrary to the Dragon, and from which he so much abhorrs, and also having the assi∣stance of the Dragon, (viz.) the Dragon-like Idola∣tries, and carnal sense-striking Rites of worship, and the tricks and delusions of his wicked Spirits at their Images or Altars to deceive the people.

4. And they worshipped the Dragon which gave Power to the Beast: namely, which had given him his Armies, his Throne, and his great Authority, that is to say, though he appears in the shape now not of the Dragon but of the Leopard or Panther, a Beast the Dragon is said so much to abhor, that is, in the gratefull shew of Christianity, yet so far forth as they gave obedience to the Paganical and Idolatrous part joyned with it, they indeed worshipped or obeyed the Dragon, whose Fiends or Goblins might please themselves to receive that worship at their Altars and Images that they had by their jugling tricks and false Miracles reintroduced into the Church, and flear a∣mongst themselves at the Imposture, that they made the Church in so gross a sense become the worshippers of Devils, as it is said in the sixth Trumpet: And they worshipped the Beast: that is, they yielded obedience to the Beast, to the Imperial Power in such a state as it was, saying, Who is like unto the Beast, who is able to make war with him? Things are so well setled and strongly this way, and so ac∣commodately to all mens liking, that neither Jew nor Pagan can be able to dissettle the Peace of the Empire in this point, or make war and raise stirs against it.

5. And there was given unto him a mouth speaking great things and blasphemies; that is, great and enormous blasphemies: which are injun∣ctions for Idolatry of several sorts; for Blasphemy in Scripture often signifies Idolatry. And Power was given unto him to continue forty and two months, the same time the outward Court is trodden down by the Gentiles; that is, the entireness of his Dominion shall continue till the seventh Semitime, till about the fourth month thereof.

6. And he opened his mouth in Blasphemy a∣gainst God to blaspheme his Name, by giving his incommunicable Name to Idols or Images; or Name may signifie his person, and so his person is blasphe∣med by Idolatry committed against him by worship∣ping any other person besides God or Christ. And his Tabernacle, namely, the Body of Christ, which is the Living Tabernacle of God, it is blasphemed more wayes than one, both in that they Idolatrously worship a mere Wafer instead thereof, and make it also so vile a thing, that it shall be at the command of every Priest for whatever uses he will please to fetch it down by his transubstantiating charm, to be devoured into the foul stomachs of the People, and as it may happen, to be eaten by base Vermine, such as Rats and Mice. And them that dwell in Hea∣ven; that is, the Saints and Angels they most wicked∣ly blaspheme, in that they set up Idols by the instiga∣tion of Evil Spirits, the Forces or Armies the old Dra∣gon delivered to the Beast, who no doubt are busie enough to assist there and play tricks, and do call these Idols by the names of the Saints or Angels, and impute these tricks there played in the behalf of Ido∣latry by them to the Saints, when they are the mere

delusions of these Goblins or Devils: Besides, it it a gross reproach to the Saints and Angels, to suppose they will accept of Religious Worship, and so prove Rebels to God: Wherefore that Power that esta∣blished and decreed such enormous things as these, Image-worship, Saint-worship and Transubstantiation, may well be said to open their mouth in blasphemy for publishing such Edicts, &c.

7. And it was given him to make war with the Saints, and to overcome them; that is, to oppose them and subdue them, and keep them under all along, that they shall have no power in the Empire, as it was said before of the mournful Witnesses, that they were Politically dead all the three Times and an half in a manner. But in some part of this time the war and slaughter or killing is not mystical but proper: For of the Waldenses and Albigenses in France alone there is said to have been slain no less than ten hun∣dred thousand. And in the Inquisition within thirty years space no less than an hundred fifty thousand per∣sons were consumed with all manner of grievances and miseries, besides infinite numbers more. And Sanderus the Jesuite reports, that an infinite number of Lothards, as he calls them, and Sacramentarians through Europe were burnt with fire and fagot, but excuses it as not done by the Pope and Bishops, but the secular Magistrate: which is the thing this Pro∣phecy foretells, that it is the Beast with ten horns, the Secular Power of the Empire, not the Beast with two horns, that is the executioner of the cruelty, or that dooms to death. Iezebel excites, but Ahab, the Secu∣lar Powers execute, or command to be executed, her bloody suggestions against Naboth, that is, against those that have the Witnesses of Jesus, the Spirit of

Prophecy as is elsewhere explained. And power was given him over all Kindreds, Tongues and Na∣tions: namely, that he might persecute and force men to Idolatrous worship in all the parts of the Em∣pire.

8. And all that dwell upon the Earth; that is, whose minds are fixed on earthly things, shall wor∣ship him, that is, obey his Idolatrous Edicts and Com∣mands: whose names are not written in the Book of Life of the Lamb slain from the foundation of the world; that is, are not of the number of the Called and Chosen, as they are termed, Chap. 17. nor of those that are redeemed from the Earth, as they are described Chap. 14. For those will ever stand out till they get the victory over the Beast.

9. If any man have an ear let him hear: For this was a remarkable intimation, and worth the ob∣serving, as also that which follows.

10. He that leadeth into Captivity shall go into Captivity: He that killeth with the sword must be killed with the sword: that is, That Power which now in this forty-two months of years of the Beast, domineers so, and forces men to their Idolatrous wor∣ship shall at last be led captive into the Truth, and they that kill now with the sword of persecution shall be slain by the sword of the spirit, which is the Word of God, answerably to the witnesses slay∣ing their enemies by the fire that came out of their mouth: Which victory was obtained in the resur∣rection of the Witnesses in a degree in the third or fourth month of the seventh or last Semitime, (viz.) in the late blessed Reformation as I have above no∣ted. Here is the patience and the faith of the Saints, that they may stand to it with these spiri∣tual

weapons till it shall please God to give them suc∣cess, as he did in the time even now mentioned.

11. And I beheld another Beast coming out of the Earth: Why there is two Beasts here since the Empire became Christian in profession, I above inti∣mated, namely because there is as it were Imperium in Imperio, a Secular Empire and Sacerdotal, which pre∣tends to an Universal Rule in ordine ad spiritualia, whenas the Pagan Emperours were Pontifices maximi, as well as Caesars. But that this other Beast is said to come out of the Earth and not out of the Sea im∣plies its more still and quiet growth, as of Plants out of the ground, or its baser extraction, the chiefest in the Sacerdotal Hierarchy being more usually of meaner Parentage. Or lastly, Earth may signifie here as it does Chap. 12. vers. 16. where Oecumenical Coun∣cils are glanced at, which though laudable in them∣selves, yet this two-horned Beast grew out of them by the abuse of that power of determining Controversies of Religion when once they had got the custom not to mind what was true and Christian, but what was for the Interest of Holy Church, though never so Worldly and Secular. And he had two horns like a Lamb: That Apostate Sacerdotal Hierarchy or Pre∣lacy pretend their Power from the Lamb Christ, of binding and loosing. It may allude also to the Bi∣shops two-horned Mitre, which the two-horned Beast wears, though it so ill beseems him; as also signifie the distribution of the Apostatized Church then into two parts as the Empire was Eastern and Western, and be∣token the two chief summities of this Sacerdotal Hie∣rarchy, the two Patriarchates of Rome and Constan∣tinople. And he spake as the Dragon; namely, in that he made Decrees for Idolatrous practises, and for

the persecuting of such as would not submit to them. This was the voice of the Old Dragon.

12. And he exerciseth all the power of the first Beast before him; that is, his whole power he hath in Religion: For the power of approving things in Religion, and passing it into a Law is in the Secular Supreme Magistrate, not in the Clergy: But this Sa∣cerdotal Hierarchy claimed all this Power, and exer∣cised it accordingly in the behalf of the former Beast, as he succeeded the Dragon in his Dragon-like power and properties. And under pretense of this power, in sacris, in matters of Religion, he causeth the Earth and them that dwell therein to worship the first Beast whose deadly wound was healed; that is, represented so as to have been healed or recovered into its former Paganical or Dragon-like condition, but by the Authority of this Sacerdotal Hierarchy, which was so prevalent with the people as to effect it; and how he effected it now follows:

13. And he doth great wonders, so that he ma∣keth fire come down from Heaven on the Earth: which is a proverbial expression of the notoriousness of a wonder, alluding to Elias his bringing fire from Hea∣ven upon those fifties. But it is as childish to under∣stand this literally here, as it would have been to un∣derstand the fire proceeding out of the mouth of the Witnesses, and their turning the waters into blood, and the like, literally. Fire from Heaven therefore here is the thundering excommunications of this Sacer∣dotal Hierarchy, whereby those that did not obey the voice of this Beast, though it was the voice of the Dragon appointing Idolatrous worship, * were rent off from the Church, and made obnoxious to eternal fire. What is a greater wonder-working-power than

this? And yet this great wonder, this two-horned Beast does. In the sight of men; that is, they are such fools as to believe he does it; especially when a Pope thunders against a Prince and his Nation for their Heresie, (viz.) the relinquishing the Supersti∣tion, Idolatry and Tyranny of the Roman Church. And Gregory the seventh when he had excommunica∣ted the Emperour Henry the fourth, said, he was ful∣mine afflatus, thunder-struck by him. These things, I confess, are rather a show of Miracles than Miracles; but Antichrist was to come with Lying and feigned Miracles. And if there might be any thing extraor∣dinary, it is imputable to the forces of the Dragon, the Evil Spirits that were bequeathed by the Dragon to the Apostatizing Empire.

14. And deceiveth them that dwell on the earth by the means of those Miracles which he had power to do in the sight of the Beast: that is, In the sight of the Lay or Secular Empire, before whom he made a show as if he did these Miracles: And whatever was in truth extraordinary, they are to be imputed to the two-horned Beast: For he claiming and accepting the Power of ordering the Empire in matters of Religion, the Forces of the Dragon be∣queathed to the ten-horned Beast fell naturally to his share. And by these assistances are done whatever looks really like something extraordinary or miracu∣lous for the promoting Idolatry and Superstition, mi∣raculous Cures and Visions, exorcising Spirits, and a deal of such stuff, whether feigned or true, these are justly imputed to the two-horned Beast, as they con∣ferr to the bringing the Empire again into a more per∣fect Pagan-like or Dragon-like condition: For by reason of these he was listened to when he made his

harangue to the people: Saying to them that dwell on the Earth, that they should make an Image to the Beast which had the wound by the sword; namely, in the fight with Michael and the Martyrs, who overcame this Beast, (viz.) the Dragon, and his pure Paganism. But this two-horned Beast revives his Image again by the means abovesaid, by the obtru∣ding of the belief of such Miracles on the people. And he lived; that is, the Old Dragon, or Pagan Superstition and Idolatry was very lively reintrodu∣ced in this Image the two-horned Beast made, by ma∣king the Empire thus Idolatrous.

15. And this Image was no spiritless Image, slug∣gish and harmless like an inanimate Statue: For the two-horned Beast had a way to transfuse Spirit and Life into it, as it follows: And he had power to give Life unto the Image of the Beast, that the Image of the Beast should both speak, and cause that as many as would not worship the Image of the Beast, that is, would not obey himself, the Secular Idolatrous Power of the Empire, should be killed: Which Power of so commanding to kill, which is the Spirit of the Image of the Beast, is derived from the two-horned Beast, or Sacerdotal Hierarchy; the Image of the Beast having no Power to kill any one for mat∣ters of Religion, but whom the Sacerdotal Hierarchy has declared Heretick; then is he delivered up to the Secular Power, the Ten-horned Beast: For the two-horned Beast kills none himself, but delivers up to the Secular Magistrate according to this very Prophecy.

16. And he, this Image of the Beast, causeth all both small and great, rich and poor, free and bond, that is, all sorts and degrees of men, to receive a mark in their right-hand, or in their foreheads,

as Soldiers or Servants do the name of their General or Master, that is, they must make open and express pro∣fession to whom they belong.

17. And that no man may buy or sell, save he that had the mark or name of the Beast, or the number of his Name: (viz.) of the two-horned Beast, the very Antichrist, who will have his marked Soldiers as well as Christ hath his; that is, no man not markt with the name of this Beast, or the num∣ber of his name, that has not either his name in letters plainly writ or in figures, that contain the number that the letters of his name make according to their numeral value (for every Greek letter has such a nu∣meral value) those that are not thus marked, that is, profess not themselves of the Faith of this Sacerdotal Hierarchy signified by the two-horned Beast, may nei∣ther buy nor sell, but are excommunicated for Here∣ticks, with whom by the very Sentence of their Sy∣nods there is to be no Negotiation. Now who this Beast, this two-horned Beast, or Sacerdotal Hierar∣chy more particularly is, is enigmatically expressed in the following Verse.

18. Here is wisdom, let him that hath under∣standing count the number of the Beast. Here is a dark riddle, let him that has skill that way number the number of the Beast. For it is the number of a Man; that is, not so strange a number, but that it may be numbred by the Art of man. And his num∣ber is six hundred threescore and six; which is to be numbred no otherwise than by the extraction of the square Root which is 25, * which is marvellously applicable to the City and Church of Rome, as 12 the root of 144 to the New Ierusalem. And that you may be sure this Sacerdotal Hierarchy of Rome is more

specially aimed at in this Vision, take another easie sense of [It is the number of a Man] that is, of a mans name. For above there is mention of the number of his name. And his name will prove 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 (La∣teinos) for those letters in their numeral value make just 666. And it is notoriously known, that the Fa∣thers of this Western Church, of which Old Rome was the Head, were stiled in subscriptions at Councils, the Latin Fathers, and the Eastern Fathers, Roman, from New Rome and the Eastern Roman Empire in those parts: So that 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 is that name of a Man, of that Man of Sin, or Antichrist, and 666 the num∣ber of this Man, that is of his name, which is a Cab∣balistical device, and by the Cabbalists called Gema∣tria. From whence we see that the pinch of this Pro∣phetick Vision at last lights more particularly on the Pope of Rome and his Clergy.

NOTES. CHAPTER XIII. Vers. 13.

Were rent off from the Church and made obnoxi∣ous to eternal fire, &c. That thunder is fire from Hea∣ven is plain, as also that the Popes Excommunications are compared to Thunder, and that Heaven in the Pro∣phetick stile are the high places in any Polity. Where∣fore his Thundering Excommunications against Princes is very fitly set out by that phrase, That he causeth fire to come down from Heaven, as if he thundered against them: Which Analogy is still more accurate, if we con∣sider what Artemidorus saith of Thunder, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. For thunder and lightning does not unite but disjoyns things that

are united: So does Excommunication, that rives off a member from the Church. And there is still a further congruity that Excommunication should be called Thun∣dering and Lightning, or fire from Heaven, in that it is the Commination of Hell fire, of which the destructi∣on of Sodom was a Type, which was burnt by fire from Heaven, as M^r J. Mede has judiciously observed: See my Synopsis Prophetica, lib. 1. cap. 6. sect. 14.

Vers. 18. Which is marvellously applicable to the City and Church of Rome, &c. Concerning this ap∣plicableness of this number 25, by way of counter-corre∣spondency, if I may so speak, to the number 12. see my My∣stery of Godliness, lib. 5. cap. 16. sect. 8. For it were too long and tedious to transcribe those things into these brief Notes.

CHAPTER XIV.

1. THere was mention in the foregoing Chapter of the Wars of the Beast, and his marked Soldiers, and of his continuance (viz. in his entire state) to the seventh Semitime of forty two months of years (which is one manner of expressing Daniel's time and times and half a time.) Now in counter-correspondency to those Soldiers and that War, in this very first Verse there is exhibited the Lamb and his Soldiers: And I looked, and Lo! a Lamb stood on Mount Sion; which is Christ against Antichrist: And with him an hundred forty four thousands: that is to say, an hundred forty four Chiliads or Re∣giments, consisting of a thousand a piece: Having his Fathers Name written in their foreheads: that is, making open profession of Christ and of God

his Father against the pretended Holy Father of Rome, the Pope, as the word signifies. Instead of receiving the mark of the two-horned Beast in their right hand, or on their foreheads, they have the name of God the Father and of his Son Christ marked on their fore∣heads, that you may see whose Soldiers they are. And in that they are said to be 144 Regiments, it denotes that they are pure Apostolick Christians, the square root of 144 being 12. Here therefore the number 144 from its root 12 denotes the Apostolick Church, as the number 666 from its root 25, the Church A∣postatizing.

2. And I heard a voice from Heaven as the voice of many waters, and as the voice of a great thunder: and I heard the voice of Harpers harp∣ing with their harps. This is a description of the Angelical Musick in Heaven, where multitudes of An∣gels praise God and the Lamb, the voice of many waters and thunder, being symbols of a multitude speaking or singing together: But it is further said of this Angelical Quire.

3. And they sung as it were a new song before the Throne, and before the four Beasts, and the Elders, and no man could learn that song but the hundred forty four thousand which were redeemed from the Earth. This Song of the Angelical Quire, which is the Joy that ariseth from the New Nature, or the Divine Nature superadded to the Animal Na∣ture, and is the same in Men and Angels, I mean re∣generate men, who thereby are made partakers of the Divine Nature, as well as the Angels; None could learn this Song, that is, none could know what be∣longs to the Joys of the New Birth, or Divine Life raised in us, that state of Righteousness, and Peace,

and Joy in the Holy Ghost, but the hundred forty four thousand redeemed from the Earth, that is, from the earthy sense and wisdom, that savours only the things of this world, and of the flesh.

4. These are they which were not defiled with women; namely, with the Daughters of Babylon, that famous strumpet the Mother of Harlots and Abo∣minations of the Earth: These would not submit themselves to the lewd debaucheries of that Idola∣trous Church. For they are Uirgins: For they have so holy and chaste a sense in the duties of Di∣vine Worship, that they abhor from every thing that has any shew of violating that loyalty and fidelity they owe to God or Christ, to whom alone they are betrothed. These are they which follow the Lamb whithersoever he goeth. These are they who are only led by his Word and Spirit, not by a blind and implicite Faith in a Church not only fallible but fal∣lacious or deceitful, most of their corruptions both in Doctrine and Worship being upheld for their own worldly interest. These were redeemed from a∣mong men, were rescued from being carried away with the stream of the rest of the Superstitious and Idolatrous Rabble, hood-winked and captivated by the false showes and subtil enticements of the most cunning Polity in the world, Being the first-fruits unto God and to the Lamb: namely, the first pure Apostolick Christians after the Apostasie, and but an handful in comparison of those multitudes that will appear after the dissolution of the Papal Tyranny.

5. And in their mouth was found no guile; that is, there was no hypocrisie nor dissembling in them, but they professed the Truth from their hearts, and concealed it not: For they are without fault before

the Throne of God; that is, in the judgment of God they are holy and upright men, though at the Tri∣bunal of Antichrist they are condemned for Hereticks, and deemed men not worthy to live, or dye an ordi∣nary death. Nay, besides what they call Heresie in them, (though according to that they do worship in purity the God of their Fathers, as S^t Paul speaks, even the Father of our Lord Jesus Christ) they add a multitude of abominable lies to make them odious to the people, but the God of Heaven knows they are guiltless, whence it is said, They are without fault before the Throne of God.

6. And I saw another Angel distinct from that Quire of Angels taken notice of before, fly in the midst of Heaven, that he may be seen and heard over all the Christian world, as well the Western as Eastern Empire, as is intimated in what follows: Having the everlasting Gospel to preach unto them that dwell on the Earth, and to every Nation, and Kindred, and Tongue, and People: that is, to preach the Everlasting Righteousness, Law, or Religion, that Christ according to Daniel was to bring in:* 1.10 Which is the pure and Apostolick Doctrine unsophisticated with the Superstitions and Idolatries of either Greek or Roman Church, which hay and stubble is to be burnt up, but that Apostolick Gospel to be Eternal, never to fail, and to spread over all.

7. Saying with a loud voice, Fear God and give Glory to him, for the hour of his judgment is come: And worship him that made Heaven and Earth, and the Sea, and the fountains of waters: And therefore none but God the Father and the Son, with the Spirit, who Created all things, is to be wor∣shipped: The Gods that have not made the Heavens

and the Earth,* 1.11 they shall perish from the Earth, and from under the Heavens, as the Prophet Ieremiah foretells: This is a plain declaration against giving any Religi∣ous Worship to any but God alone: And therefore a commination against all Saint-worshippers and Image-worshippers, or whatever other Idolatry in the Greek or Roman Church. That this voice of the Angel re∣spects the Edicts and Degrees of those Greek Empe∣rours that protested so zealously against Saint-wor∣ship and Image-worship, namely the Decrees of Leo Isaurus, Constantinus Iconomaches, Leo Armenius, Mi∣chael Balbus and Theophilus, I do not deny, but this Angelical Monition was the most loudly and earnest∣ly urged upon the Christian World at the dreadfull siege and storming of Constantinople, and the subdu∣ing the whole Eastern Church and Empire to the Turk. This was a plain manifestation that the hour of his judgement was come against such gross Idola∣ters. And yet though his judgements flew so high, and sounded so loud as to give notice to all Christen∣dome, yet the Western Church would take no notice thereof, as it is predicted Chap. 9. vers. 20. And the rest of the men which were not killed by these plagues from the Euphratean Horsemen, which are the Turks, yet repented not of the works of their hands, that they should not worship Demons and Idols of Gold and Sil∣ver, &c. And therefore if we hear news of the hand of God upon the Western Church also, I mean upon the Idolatrous Hierarchy thereof, which is more parti∣cularly stiled Babylon, we need not be much surpri∣zed: And thus we read in the next verse.

8. And there followed another Angel saying, Babylon is fallen, is fallen, that great City, or Polity, bicause she made all Nations, the Eastern

as well as the Western Church (as may be observed in the Popes activity at the second Nicene Council, and in excommunicating the Iconoclast Emperours) drink of the wine of the wrath of her fornication, of the Philter she had mingled for them, the Love-poison, or Love-potion of her fornication, by which is plainly un∣derstood Idolatry. To the voice of this Angel be∣longs the Reformation, when so many Provinces and Principalities fell off from the Church of Rome, and was a pledge of her further ruine: Here therefore ends the Thyatirian Interval, and that of Sardis be∣gins, in which is contained the effusion of the Vials, all but the last.

9. And the third Angel followed them, saying with a loud voice, If any man worship the Beast and his Image; that is, give obedience to the Se∣cular and Spiritual Power in such things as are Idola∣trous, and are the very strokes and lineament of the Image of the Beast, and receive his, the Beasts, mark in his forehead, or in his hand; that is, make pro∣fession of, or promote and countenance the Romish Idolatrous Religion:

10. The same shall drink of the wine of the wrath of God, which is poured out without mix∣ture into the cup of his indignation. He shall drink of the cup of bitterness and malediction from the Lord. And he shall be tormented with fire and brimstone in the presence of the holy Angels, and in the presence of the Lamb.

11. And the smoke of their torment ascendeth up for ever and ever; that is, all they shall be con∣demned to those infernal and eternal flames, who un∣der the voice of this third Angel shall persist in the gross Idolatries, and other foul corruptions of the

Church of Rome: For under the voice of this Angel, the abominations of that Church will be so fully dis∣covered, and convincingly, that the adherers thereto will be generally deemed uncapable of salvation, with any that have any remainders of judgment and con∣science in them. And they have no rest day nor night who worship the Beast and his Image, and whosoever receiveth the mark of his Name. Truth against the Church of Rome will be then so dear, that no man that has any Conscience can be of that Reli∣gion and Profession, but it will lye exceeding un∣evenly in his mind, it will put him in restless and unsatisfied condition, it appearing so manifestly a∣gainst all sense, all reason, all honesty and loyalty, and against all those sound and sacred Principles that God hath implanted in the nature of man: Where∣fore in those dayes no honest-hearted man can endure to submit to the Church of Rome. From whence it follows,

12. Here is the patience of the Saints. This is the time wherein the patience of the Saints will be tryed, the external carnal power of the enemy en∣deavouring to force them against so great Light, to submit to their Idolatrous and Antichristian usages by cruel and barbarous persecutions: Wherefore this an∣swers to that passage in the Epistle to the Church of Sardis, which contains a commination for their more general deadness and degeneracy, whereby the bet∣ter sort amongst them are brought to this jeopardy and distress. Here are they that keep the Com∣mandments of God, and the faith of Iesus: that is, Here are they that will say unto their persecutors, Whether it be right in the sight of God,* 1.12 to hearken unto you more than unto God, judge you? Here are they

that keep to the pure Faith and Doctrine of Christ and his Apostles, and will not submit to any new-coined forms, invented for worldly Interest, and con∣trary to the Faith and Doctrine of Christ and his A∣postles. And surely God will give at last to the suf∣ferings of such holy and sincere souls sutable victory and success, as is intimated in the following Verse:

13. And I heard a voice from Heaven, saying unto me, Write, Blessed are the dead that dye in the Lord: That dye as Martyrs in witness to his Truth against the abominable corruptions of that Ido∣latrous Church. From henceforth, are they blessed, that is, from this time of the Sardian Interval that here is intimated, a time when the Scales begin to turn, and nearer approach is made to the Philadel∣phian State, which commenceth with the Reign of the Spirit, as the Cabbalists call it; and therefore it follows, Yea, saith the Spirit. The Spirit that is to bring on these days, sets his Seal thereto: That they may rest from their labours: For their martyrdom puts an end to their pains and toyles in this world: And their works do follow them; that is, the ef∣fect and success of their works and labour here, which are the hoped consequences thereof: Which expect∣ed effect and success is the restoring of the Kingdom of Christ upon the overthrow of the salvage and barbarous tyranny of a bloody Idolatrous Church, which murders and massacres men, and does all ima∣ginable despight to them, because they will not sin against the manifest Laws of Christ to serve the lewd worldly ends, and interest of Antichrist.

14. And I looked and behold a white cloud, and upon the cloud one sat like unto the Son of Man, having on his head a golden Crown. This is Christ

that Son of Man in Daniel,* 1.13 who is said to come with the Clouds of Heaven, as if they were his Chariot, and Dominion, and Glory, and a Kingdome, as here a Crown is said to be given unto him; And in his hand a sharp sickle. That Christ himself here ap∣pears with his sickle in his hand ready to reap, is very agreeable to what was intimated before of the Reign of the Spirit, and the approaching thereof: For what he is said to do by himself is by the Ministry of his Spirit in counterdistinction to humane and carnal means. This is about the time of the sixth Vial.

15. And another Angel came out of the Temple, representing the holy Church, and her earnest and sincere Devotions for the enlargement of the King∣dom of Christ: And therefore it is added, Crying with a loud voice to him that sate on the Cloud, Thrust in thy sickle and reap, for the time is come for thee to reap, for the harvest of the Earth is ripe: Like that of our blessed Saviour himself; Lift up your eyes and look on the fields,* 1.14 for they are white already to harvest.

16. And he that sate on the cloud thrust in his sickle on the Earth, and the Earth was reaped: namely, that crop that belonged to that season, which as I said, is about the sixth Vial, which contempori∣zeth with the Vision of the Lambs Bride: And there∣fore by this Harvest happily may be prefigured the gathering of the Jews to the Faith of Christ, which will prove a further enlargement of his Kingdom: But the most universal conquest of all follows in the next Vision, which contemporizeth with the seventh or last Vial.

17. And another Angel came out of the Temple which is in Heaven, [which is in Heaven] is omit∣ted,

vers. 15. as needless, because the Reaper there is Christ himself, which implies his immediate assistance in that work. But this Angel being himself to be Vintager, there is mention made of Heaven, to intimate his heavenly mission, that he is sent from God, and im∣mediately assisted by his Spirit. The appearance of which Reign of the Spirit will be eminent under this seventh Vial, which contemporizeth with the Vision of the Rider of the White Horse, with a sharp two-edged sword coming out of his mouth, this Angel also having a sharp sickle; which fitly answers to the sharp two-edged sword coming out of the mouth of the Rider of the white Horse: Both of them sig∣nifie the cutting convictiveness of the Word and Spi∣rit in the powerful Ministers of Christ in those days.

18. And another Angel came out from the Al∣tar, which had power over fire: The Altar, as else∣where in the Apocalypse, is a symbol of the sacrifice of Martyrdom. And here is mention of Fire, because that kind of Martyrdom was so frequently inflicted by that Murderous and Idolatrous Church of Rome up∣on the Faithful Witnesses of Christ, who bore Testi∣mony against the abominations of that bloody Syna∣gogue. And cryed with a loud cry to him that had the sharp sickle; namely, for vengeance against this den of cruel Murderers and Idolaters; saying, Thrust in thy sharp sickle and gather the clusters of the Uine of the Earth, for the Grapes are fully ripe; that is, some are in full ripeness and readiness for Con∣version, and for others their sins are fully ripe for ut∣ter destruction and confusion. But I conceive this Vi∣sion respects more especially the former, which yet in∣volves the destruction and confusion of the latter.

19. And the Angel thrust in his sickle into the Earth, and gathered the Uine of the Earth, and cast it into the great Wine-press of the wrath of God; that is, men were pressed in conscience upon the sharp convictions of the powerful Ministers of Christ with sorrow for their sins; and the wrath of God against themselves was kindled in them: As the Apostle writes to the Corinthians concerning the like conviction.* 1.15 What carefulness it wrought in you, what indignation, what vehement desire, what revenge. Here Christ, who is said to tread the wine-press of Gods wrath alone, treads and squeezeth out the corrupt blood of Edom. And in the Vision which is parallel to this Chap. 19. his Vesture is said to be dipt in blood, and that he treadeth the wine-press of the fierceness of the wrath of Almighty God: which plainly shows, that these two Visions tend to one and the same thing.

20. And the Wine-press was trodden without the City: that is, this powerful conviction neither began in, nor reached to the City of Babylon, the Ro∣man Hierarchy or Polity; (for wood and stone is not here meant, but a Polity or Society of men) as is ob∣servable in the seventh Vial; that though the Cities of the Nations fell by those powerful Boanerges's yet this Babylon the great, though hail-stones of a Talent weight fell upon them, were not converted or con∣vinced in their consciences, but blasphemed God, be∣cause of the plague of the hail, it was so exceeding great. And in the Vision of the Rider of the White Horse, the false Prophet and his adherents were taken, and their power abolished, as to that Tyranny and Idolatry they exercised before; but it was the rest only that were slain with the Sword that proceeded out of the

mouth of him that sate on the white Horse, it was they only that were converted and convinced by the powerful preaching of the Everlasting Gospel, the pure Gospel of Christ cleansed from all the filth and trumperies, all the Idolatries and Superstitions of An∣tichrist. And they are the same that are pressed here by Christs Vintagers or Grape-pressers, but the City of Babylon proves obdurate and uncapable of any such pressure of conscience, or true contrition for her Abo∣minations, so strongly is she hardened in her pretense of Infallibility. And blood came out of the Wine-press even to the Horses bridles. This again shows plainly that the Vision of the Rider of the white Horse and his Company, and this of the Wine-press is all one: But this signifies a full conviction in the con∣victed and a perfect victory over the contumacious, which is further illustrated by what follows: By the space of a thousand and six hundred furlongs, which signifies the exceeding largeness and universality, as it were, of the victory, if we read as we may, sixteen Hecatontads or Centuries of furlongs. And then as in the number 666, and as in the 144 Chiliads, by ex∣tracting the square root we find the symbolical mean∣ing of them; so by the extracting the square root of sixteen which is four, we find the symbolical mean∣ing of this: * For four is the symbol of Vniversa∣lity with the Pythagoreans and Cabbalists: Which construction sutes wonderfully well with the Visions this is a parallel to, namely, that of the seventh Vial, and the Battel of the Rider of the White Horse: Which is the Battel of that Great Day of God Al∣mighty, to which the Kings of the Earth, and of the whole world are gathered together; and the de∣feat is proportionable: For upon this defeat all the

Kingdoms of the World will become the Kingdoms of God, and of his Christ.

NOTES. CHAPTER XIV. Vers. 20.

For four is the symbol of Universality with the Py∣thagoreans and Cabbalists, &c. That the Ancient true Cabbalists held the number Four to be a symbol of Uni∣versality is plain from the fourth dayes Creation: Which is indeed the Creation of the whole world in ge∣neral according to the Philosophick Cabbala. And as for the Pythagoreans it is frequent with them to call their Tetractys, that is, the number four, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, All Number, as Photius observes; because all number is made up in Ten, and the putting together of every number in Four, (viz.) 1, 2, 3, 4. makes up Ten, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, saith he, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. For this reason the Pythagoreans cal∣led the number [four] All number, or the whole number. And Suidas reports the same almost in the very same words concerning the Pythagoreans. For the abovesaid reason, saith he, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, they called the number [Four] All number, as universally comprehending all Number in it. And Philo Judaeus, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. The number [Four] is called All number, or the whole Number, be∣cause it comprehends what reaches to [Ten] and the Number [Ten] it self. Which again he asserts, but with that distinction, that, [Ten] is, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, All number, or the whole entire Number 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, actually, but [Four] 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, potentially▪ which

Hierocles expresseth thus, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. Whereby he would insinuate, that before we make up explicitly [Ten] by the Numbers contained in [Four;] (viz.) 1, 2, 3, 4. there is notwithstanding an implicite or com∣plicate entireness of [Ten] in the Number [Four.] Which is sufficient to make it a symbol of Universality. See Meursius his Denarius Pythagoricus. This there∣fore being the symbolical significancy of [Four] the root of Sixteen, I do not doubt but that I have hit upon the genuine sense of the sixteen hundred furlongs. But be∣fore I was aware of this Mystery I was fain to take up with M^r Mede's conceit, that they relate to Stato della Chiesa, and to the Holy Land, but so as I understood it mystically: For the literal sense of sixteen hundred furlongs overflown with blood, so that it reached to the horse-bridles, never seemed to me either credible or tolerable.

CHAPTER XV.

IN two several setts of Visions, the one contained in the eleventh Chapter, the other in the twelfth, thirteenth and fourteenth Chapters, and each of them beginning from the first Epocha of the Christian Church, and ending with the last Vial, or first thun∣der, have the Prophecies of the Opened Book hitherto been contained, as being most general and compre∣hensive, taking in all the five intervals of the Ephe∣sine, Smyrnean, Pergamenian, Thyatirian and Sardian Churches, together with the beginning of the Phila∣delphian. Now according to right method, some par∣ticulars

are more copiously or clearly explained: As for example, the transition out of the Thyatirian con∣dition into the Sardian; the Joy and Triumph there∣of is competently set out, Chap. 11. vers. 15, 16, 17. and more sparingly, Chap. 14. vers. 8. but most clear∣ly and illustriously in this 15^th Chapter vers. 2, 3, 4. Which plainly demonstrates, that before the effusion of the Vials, there is a considerable victory over the Beast. For that Doxologie, Chap. 11. is after the ri∣sing of the Witnesses. And that triumphant acclama∣tion, Chap. 14. vers. 8. not before the fall of Babylon. And here most expresly of all in this Chapter, there is thanks for a notable lately gotten victory over the Beast, and over his Image, &c. before we come to the effusion of the Vials, so that these things notably confirm one another. To say nothing how the very name Sardis signifies Canticum laetitiae, a Song of Ioy.

1. And I saw another sign in Heaven great and marvellous, seven Angels having the seven last plagues, for in them is filled up the wrath of God. Namely, against the Beast or Roman Hierarchy, that was punished considerably by the Reformation; but before there Vials be over, In the cup that she has fil∣led, it will be filled to her double: The seven last plagues, which therefore in all reason are to be in the last Wo-trumpet, and the second Wo-trumpet was past at the rising of the Witnesses: And therefore the effusion of the Vials must be after the rising of the Witnesses, and the rising of the Witnesses the Prote∣stant Reformation, when so many Provinces and Principalities had cast off the Yoke, and freed them∣selves from the sad bondage of that Roman Pharaoh, the Papal Hierarchy, as the Israelites of old were deli∣vered from the slavery of Aegypt: And therefore it follows,

2. And I saw as it were a Sea of glass min∣gled with fire: This seems to have a double allusi∣on, either to the Sea of Glass, like unto Crystal, be∣fore the Throne, Chap. 4. vers. 5. which the light of the seven Lamps there shined upon, or else to the Red Sea congealed, as it were, into two walls of Glass or Ice, on which the Angel in a pillar of Fire going before the Israelites shined also and the redness of the sand of the Sea made the mixture more like fire. And them that had gotten the victory over the Beast, and over his Image, such as had got free from both the Sacerdotal and Secular Idolatrous Power, that they could not longer persecute them for not submitting to their Pagan-like Abominations: And over his mark, and over the number of his Name; that is, That now could neither be forced to swear into the forms of that false Church by a sla∣vish implicite faith, nor to profess himself a Latin or Roman Catholick, but a free Apostolick Christian: Stand on the sea of Glass, on the shore of that Sea that was converted into Glass or Ice when they passed through it, as newly escaped the persecution of that Roman Pharaoh, who was overthrown Horse and Man in the Red Sea, that is, by the Protestants profession, that they were only justified by the blood of Christ, and the sanctification of his Spirit, which is resembled by fire: Having the Harps of God, that is, Holy or large Harpe.

3. And they sing the Song of Moses the Ser∣vant of God, and the song of the Lamb; that is, They sing the Song of the Lamb, of which the Song of Moses was but a Type, but the occasions so like one another, that the Song may indifferently serve both: But in the mean time, it is plain here, that

Rome is that Spiritual Aegypt, wherein the Witnesses were slain, and the Bishop of Rome the Pharaoh thereof: Saying, Great and marvellous are thy works Lord God Almighty, just and true are thy ways, O King of Saints.

4. Who shall not fear thee, O Lord, and glori∣fie thy Name, for thou only art holy, for all Na∣tions shall come and worship before thee, for thy judgments are manifest: Shall come and worship before thee, which implies, that this first victory is but the first-fruits of that elargement God intends for the Kingdom of his Son Christ.

5. And after that I looked, namely after this Triumphal Song of the Harpers, that had gotten the victory over the Beast, and over his Image, and over his Mark, and over the number of his Name: For it is absurd to conceive a triumphal Song before the victory, or this victory to be of the Primitive Chri∣stians over the Pagans, because of the Image of the Beast, and his Mark, and the number of his Name: And therefore it must be the victory of the Prote∣stants over the Paganochristians. Whence it is impos∣sible, that the first Vial, and the first Trumpet should contemporize. And behold the Temple of the Ta∣bernacle of the Testimony in Heaven was open∣ed: Which answers to that, Chap. 11. vers. 19. And the Temple of God was opened in Heaven; which again assures us, that the effusion of the Vial is after the rising of the Witnesses; namely out of what fol∣lows.

6. And the seven Angels came out of the Tem∣ple, having the seven plagues; that is, designed to that Office: Cloathed in pure and white linnen, and having their Breasts girded with golden gir∣dles;

that is, being clothed in priestly attire, as be∣ing heavenly Priests belonging to that Heavenly Temple, that is to say, as being so represented.

7. And one of the four Beasts; the Lion haply, it being the most military Beast, and a Beast of an∣ger and courage: Gave unto the seven Angels se∣ven golden Uials full of the wrath of God who li∣veth for ever and ever: Whence it is intimated, that these Ministers were to be actuated, not by any pri∣vate spleen, but by the just wrath of God, which burneth only against obstinate Hypocrites and Sin∣ners.

8. And the Temple was filled with smoak from the glory of God, and from his power▪ that is to say, from the glorious power of God in taking ven∣geance of the Beast, or false Prophet, in reference to whom chiefly is the pouring out of the Vials, till he be taken and cast out into the lake of fire and brim∣stone, and so all Idolatrous and Tyrannical power be abolished: No settlement till then, but all filled ever and anon with confusion, dust and smoak. And no man was able to enter into the Temple till the seven plagues of the seven Angels were fulfilled; that is, there is no recovery of the Church into that state thereof, which is decyphered by 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the Temple of God, Chap. 11. vers. 1. till the seven plagues of the seven Angels be fulfilled, accordingly as has been signified. Then will the Temple become sym∣metral again and commensurable, not only to the Reed of a Man but of an Angel, nor to a Reed any way combustible, but to a Golden Reed. This is to be under the second Thunder that immediately fol∣lows the last Vial, at the descent of the New Ierusa∣lem from Heaven, of which state it is said, Lo! the

Tabernacle of God is with men, and they will become his Living Temple pure and undefiled; otherwise, There is no Temple there but God Almighty, and the Lamb is the Temple thereof. This setled state of the Church, which is the Temple of God, will not appear till after the effusion of the Vials.

CHAPTER XVI.

SOme strictures there were, and glances at the things that appertain to the Vials after the Ri∣sing of the Witnesses, Chap. 11. and after the fall of Babylon, Chap. 14. but hinted very maimedly, ob∣scurely, and interruptedly. But the Vials in this Chapter are more fully and orderly set down; as we shall see by perusing the Chapter.

1. And I heard a great voice out of the Temple, (out of which the Angels had come forth, Chap. 15. vers. 6.) saying to the seven Angels, Go your wayes and pour out the Uials of the wrath of God (which ye received from one of the four Beasts) up∣on the Earth; that is, upon this Terrestrial or Ter∣raqueous Globe.

2. And the first went and poured out his Uial upon the Earth: (viz.) in that sense of Earth that was intimated before; for it means no more than on this Terraqueous Globe, unless there be an allusion to the ashes of the furnace from which the Aegyptian blains and boiles did arise, as certainly there is an al∣lusion to those Aegyptian plagues both in this and in other Vials; whereby we may be assured, that these plagues belong to that City or Society, that is spiritu∣ally called Aegypt, namely to the Papal or Antichri∣stian

Hierarchy, that has so long kept the Children of God in bondage, and in which the Witnesses have been so often slain. Earth therefore here is chiefly repeated to bear a correspondence in the outward Cortex, with Sea, Rivers and Air, as if God would stir up all the Elements or Nature to fight against the Beast, and the Antichristian Powers. And there fell a noisome and grievous sore upon the men which had the mark of the Beast, and upon them which worshipped his Image; that is, the minds of the Pontifician party were extreamly enraged and ex∣ulcerated with fury and envy against the risen Wit∣nesses (as an Evil Spirit from the Lord troubled Saul) when they beheld them [Chap. 11. vers. 12.] ascend∣ing to Heaven,* 1.16 that is, called up to high places and dignities in Church and State, and that the Papal Ido∣latrous Power and Tyranny was abolished. This Cup of Bitterness, Wrath, Envy and intoxicating Zeal for so foul a Cause, was the effusion of the first Vial upon them, which did so work upon them, and de∣mentate them, that they made themselves still more execrable and odious by their impotent and unsuc∣cessful attempts against them, that God had thus exalted above their reach. In the mean time we see how naturally (besides the letting loose Evil Spi∣rits upon them) the first Vial follows the rising of the Witnesses accordingly as it is glanced at Chap. 11. vers. 18. immediately after their rising, and those Trium∣phant Doxologies for the same, (those Songs of Joy from whence the Sardian Church has her Name, which here commenceth.) And the Nations, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the Heathen were angry, &c. by which are understood the Antichristian party, as by Iews, the truly Christian (chap. 2.9.) in the stile of the Apocalypse.

3. And the second Angel poured out his Uial upon the Sea; that is, upon some parts of the Sea: And Sea in the Prophetick stile signifying the gather∣ing together of the People into one Polity or King∣dom, it must signifie some parts of this Kingdom or Polity; which is here the Jurisdiction or Dominion of the Papacy. Of some parts therefore of this Sea it is said, And it became as the blood of a dead man▪ and every living soul died in the Sea: (viz.) in these parts of this Sea which were turned into blood there were no live fishes to be caught there any more: and fishes dead in the Sea signifie disappoint∣ment of hope, and that what we expect will not come to pass. In such a state was the Papal Hierarchy af∣ter the settlement of the Reformation in so many Provinces, Principalities and Kingdoms; which dead∣ness and hopelesness of his affairs there, brought to pass by the good Providence of God, was the pour∣ing out the second Vial upon these parts of this Sea or Jurisdiction, and turning them into blood, and the quite spoiling any further fishing there.

4. And the third Angel poured out his Uial up∣on the Rivers and Fountains of waters, and they became blood: As Sea signified above Politically, so Rivers and Fountains of Waters or Springs must, that are the Heads of Rivers, and both come from the Sea and return thither again, (viz.) the water of them. A Sea therefore here being a Kingdom or Po∣lity, the Rivers must be Emissary Powers of the said Kingdom, whether Armies, or other Agents, with those that Head them or Govern them, who may be deemed the Spring-heads of them, they taking their directions and motions from them, and depending on them as Rivers do on their Springs: And this plague

of turning Rivers into blood being manifestly one of the plagues of Aegypt, these Emissaries must be the Emissaries of that City or Polity which is spiritually called Aegypt, which is the Papal Hierarchy: And the turning these Rivers into blood, is the putting to death such Emissaries for their treasonable attempts against Kings or Princes, and the setled Religion and Government of the place.

5. And I heard the Angel of the Waters say, (viz.) the Prefect of the multitudes of people, Thou art Righteous, O Lord, which art, and wast, and shall be; that is, thou art just, O Jehovah, thou great Judge and King, because thou hast judged thus:

6. For they have shed the blood of Saints and Prophets; namely, in the Pergamenial Interval, in which thy faithful Martyr Antipas was slain with the sword, besides many other bloody butcheries and massacres of the people of God. And thou hast gi∣ven them blood to drink, for they are worthy, as having shed so much innocent blood.

7. And I heard another out of the Altar, say, that is, out of that place of the Temple where the Altar stood, and where so many Burnt-offerings were made: Even so Lord God Almighty, true and righ∣teous are thy judgements: For I can witness what a number of Innocent Souls were burnt with fire and fagot in the Thyatirian Interval of the Church, be∣cause they would not submit to the gross Superstiti∣ons and Idolatries, and incredible, nay, impossible figments of the Roman Hierarchy, and so were made Burnt-offerings or Sacrifices to their intolerable Ava∣rice, Ambition, and Tyrannical Cruelty.

8. And the fourth Angel poured out his Uial upon the Sun: Sun here may have either a Politi∣cal sense or a Mystical: Mystically understood, it may be the Word of God, which is a Lamp unto our feet, and a light unto our paths; as the great Lamp of the Universe is naturally understood to be: The Vial therefore poured upon the Sun, are clear convictive explications of the Word of God, the Prophetical parts thereof especially whereby manifestly are disco∣vered the unrighteous Mysteries of the Kingdom of Antichrist, that men may see in what a foul conditi∣on they are, how apostatized from God and Christ, and how plainly, and reproachfully their abominable doings are characterized by the finger of God in Scri∣pture, and how lively their most direful and diabo∣lical Image is there described: Whence it is no won∣der, that it immediately is said, And power was gi∣ven unto him to scorch men with fire.

9. And men were scorched with great heat, and blasphemed the Name of God which hath power over these plagues, and they repented not to give him Glory. They are so vext, that they blaspheme the Name of God, and rather vilifie the Scriptures, and the Spirit that wrote them, than repent them of their sins, and give Glory to God by acknowledging the Truth; as certainly the true sense of the Prophe∣cies of Daniel and the Apocalypse where they are known and acknowledged, tend exceeding much to the Glory of God, and the illustration of the con∣stancy of his Providence. And this may go for the mystical sense of the effusion of the Vial upon the Sun: But there may be also a Political one; and then Sun is to be understood of the greatest Secular Power within the Papal Jurisdiction; which therefore is the

German Empire. Wherefore if any German Empe∣rour, or any Potentate as considerable as the German Emperour, should be so illuminated with the true knowledge of the Gospel, as cordially to resent the cause thereof, the general Reformation that he would introduce into his Empire, through the light and zeal he has conceived for the Truth, will scorch and burn, and vex the vassals of the two-horned Beast at the very heart, and so will prove the completion of the pouring out the Vial on the Sun in the most proper Political sense.

10. And the fifth Angel poured out his Uial up∣on the seat of the Beast, namely of the two-horned Beast, or false-Prophet against whom chiefly these Vi∣als are meant. In a mystical sense therefore corre∣spondent to the former, the Greek word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 here may be the same that Cathedra, the pretended Infal∣lible Chair of that Pseudo-prophet. To the detection of whose frauds the Vial poured out on the Sun my∣stically understood may prepare the way: For though the sworn Vassals of the two-horned Beast blaspheme the Name of God, by reason of that more than or∣dinary light of the Word under the fourth Vial; yet Providence may so manage things, that by virtue of those clear explications of Prophecies under the fourth Vial, the people may be generally convinced of the false pretense of the Papal Hierarchy's Infallibility un∣der the fifth. The false light of which vain pretense being once removed, they must needs find themselves much in the dark, their Religion being such as nei∣ther Scripture, Reason, common Sense, nor any thing else, that has any authority with it, can afford any light to: Nay, it will be found repugnant to all these. Wherefore it rightly follows: And his Kingdom

was full of darkness: Which is again one of the plagues of Aegypt. And they gnawed their tongues for pain: For this cheat of Infallibility being disco∣vered by the clear demonstration of the Apostasie of the Church out of the Prophecies, they are quite left in the dark, hopeless and helpless, and know not now what hank to have over the people, who before were made to believe any thing, which made for the Churches power and gain, upon this pretense, of the Infallibility of their Church.

11. And blasphemed the God of Heaven, because of their pains and of their sores: The event of so great manifestations of Truth was so vexatious to them, that they reproached the Author of it, the Spi∣rit of God, and the holy Scriptures. And they re∣pented not of their deeds: The heart of this Pha∣raoh, the King of this Mystical or Spiritual Aegypt, it seems, is so hardened under these plagues, that he will not let the Israelites, the true Apostolick Christians, go and serve God as he has commanded, but forcibly keeps them under to serve his own worldly designs against the Will of God. This may be the Mystical meaning of this fifth Vial; but there may be also a Political sense: And then the Throne or Seat of this two-horned Beast is the same with the Seat of the Whore, who is seated on seven-hilled Rome. And in this sense it bodes ill to that City, as if there would be a sacking of Rome, and banishing the Pope from thence; or at least, as if from the effects of the for∣mer Vial politically understood, there would be a great deadness of Trade to that greatest Merchant of the great Men of the Earth; and so great unfrequent∣edness, obscurity and darkness would seize his Prin∣cipal Seat.

12. And the sixth Angel poured cut his Uial upon the great River Euphrates, and the water thereof was dryed up, that the way of the Kings of the East might be prepared. That the Euphra∣tean Horsemen are the Turks, we have noted in the sixth Trumpet. This Vial therefore seems to in∣timate such a mutation of affairs in the Turkish Em∣pire as will make for the joyning of the Iews, and it may be some other Eastern People with their Princes or Persons of Note, with the Church of Christ, as be∣ing either converted, or in a near preparation to con∣version to his Gospel, as may appear from Chap. 19. vers. 7, 8. For the Marriage of the Lambs Wife there immediately precedes the battel of the Rider of the White Horse, which undoubtedly is the same Vision in effect with the seventh Vial: And so much of the six first Vials. The Scene of the seventh now begins, which contains the Victory of the True Apostolick Church of Christ over the Antichristian Church, and the rest of the world that are Infidels, Atheists and Unbelievers, who are here all gathered together a∣gainst the Lord, and against his Christ, but divida∣ble into two parts, Antichristian properly so called, which contains the Beast and the False Prophet, and the Infidel party that believe not in Christ at all: And the third party of this conflux, are the Pure Evange∣lical Christians.

13. And I saw three unclean spirits like Frogs come out of the mouth of the Dragon, and out of the mouth of the Beast, and out of the mouth of the false Prophet: These are the Emissaries, Ora∣tors, Negotiators or Solicitors of the Affairs of the Dragon, and of the Beast and false Prophet (the two parties I even now intimated opposite to the Evan∣gelical

Party) though these Negotiators are called the spirits of Devils in the following Verse, according to the usual genius and stile of the Apocalypse, put∣ting Angels and Spirits for that company of men that be conceived to be under their guidance: But they have the shape of Frogs for their earthliness and sli∣my uncleanness, to betoken that the wisdom they act from is earthly, sensual and devillish.

14. For they are the Spirits of Devils work∣ing Miracles. And the Onirocriticks tell us, that Frogs, in whose shape these Spirits are, signifie 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Enchanters or Iuglers, prestigious decei∣vers of the People by false Miracles, feigned Visions, or the like, which haply may be more peculiar to the Antichristian party, the Beast and false Prophet: But the Frog out of the Dragons mouth, his Miracles may be, besides those of unlawful Magick, prestigious de∣monstrations, whereby he would pretend to demon∣strate the frivolousness of all revealed Religion, at least, the better to animate, or rather harden the hearts of the Kings of the Earth against the Pure and Apostolick Christian. Which go forth unto the Kings of the Earth, and of the whole world to gather them to the battel: For as that wisdome which is from above is pure and peaceable, so this earthly and devilish wisdom delights in confusion and blood. Of that great day of God Almighty, under whose conduct are the Evangelical party, or the pure and Apostolick Christians.

15. Behold I come as a thief. This defeat of false and ineffectual Religions will be a surprizing Providence to all those that hypocritically shrowd themselves under them instead of being cloathed with the Everlasting Righteousness of the Gospel of Christ,

to those that cover with a covering, but not of Gods Spirit, that they may add sin to sin: But all such co∣verings shall be accounted as nakedness before God, or they will be stript of it and made naked: Whence it follows; Blessed is he that watcheth and keepeth his garments, lest he walk naked, and they see his shame; that is, who is so watchful over his ways, and intent on the work of real Regeneration, which will appear also in his outward Conversation, that he becomes cloathed in such a garment as shall not be taken from him in this time when God will pluck off the covering from all Nations, and the veil of Hypo∣crisie from off the People,* 1.17 as Esay somewhere fore∣tells: Which is a plain intimation, that this Battel is not Carnal but Spiritual.

16. And he gathered them together into one place, called in the Hebrew tongue Armageddon; that is, by the over-ruling Providence of God they were brought into this place, which in the Hebrew tongue signifies the destruction of their Armies; but there is nothing yet done toward their discomfiture, for the seventh Vial is not yet poured out: * And therefore by a Commutation of Iconismes, the event of this Congress is set out in another form, this huge Camp of all the Armies of both sides, being turned into one mighty City, which is called the Great City, consisting of the Universality of Cities considered as one, as it follows in the Prophecie.

17. And the seventh Angel poured out his Uial into the Air, namely over this great Company; and there came a great voice out of the Temple of Hea∣ven from the Throne, saying, It is done: This is a firm Decree from him that sits on the Throne, and a full assurance by his Spirit universally in the hearts

of his Servants, the Evangelical Party, that their Mi∣nistry shall succeed; And as to the utter overthrow of Antichrist, and the enlargement of the Kingdom of Christ by the conversion of the Gentiles, the my∣stery of God shall be consummate under this seventh Vial: The thing is as sure as it were done already.

18. And there were voices, and thunders, and lightenings, and there was a great earthquake, such as was not since men were upon Earth, so mighty an earthquake, and so great; that is, there was such a strange Commutation of Affairs in the world as was never known or recorded in any Histo∣ry of former Times: Of such mighty efficacy was the preaching of the Gospel in the power of the Spirit, by the speaking party of the Army of Christ, against the Forces of the Infidels and Antichrist: For this is the meaning of those Voices, and Thunders, and Lightenings, that it was the promulgation (by these Boanergers's) of the Law of the Son of God,* 1.18 which is like unto fire, as is related in Esdras.

19. And the great City was divided into three parts; as there were three parts in the great Camp before: The Antichristian party, the Infidel or pure∣ly Heathen party, and the pure Evangelical party: But this Tripartition is named immediately after this great Earthquake, as if it were the effect of it, for the more handsom embellishing the outward Cortex of the Prophecy. * And the Cities of the Nations fell, that is, the Heathenish or Infidel party were thunder∣struck by these Boanerges's, and converted to the Faith of the Gospel of Christ in the simplicity and pu∣rity thereof: And great Babylon came in remem∣brance before God; that is, the Antichristian Hierar∣chy with her adherents, the Whore of Babylon, as she

is called in the following Chapter: To give unto her the cup of the wine of the fierceness of his wrath, (viz.) of the wrath of God, that is, to be arraigned and judged, that condign punishment and vengeance may be taken of her.

20. And every Island fled away, and the Moun∣tains were not found: Their Temples, and other consecrated places were taken from them, and they were deprived of their Dignities, or of the Assistances of the great Ones of the Earth.

21. And there fell upon men a great hail out of Heaven, every stone about the weight of a Talent, namely upon Babylon, or the Antichristian party: So that all her goodly trees were spoiled and stript of their both leaves and fruit, their boughs broke down, and their stocks beaten bare even to the inmost bark. And men blasphemed God because of the plague of the hail, for the plague thereof was exceeding great; that is, the hearts of this Antichristian party were still hardened even in this last Aegyptian plague inflicted on them, and their rage and impatience un∣der their calamity made them speak evil of the ways of God which yet are altogether righteousness and truth: Or if in these miseries they took themselves to their devotions, * their very prayers were blasphe∣my in the stile of the Apocalypse, they being so min∣gled with various sorts of Idolatry.

NOTES. CHAPTER XVI. Vers. 16.

And therefore by a Commutation of Iconismes, &c. This is called Iconismorum Metallaxis in my Synopsis Prophetica: And it is a Prophetick Figure, whereby the Image or Representation that is begun with, is not continued but changed, and yet the same matter still pursued: See Synops. Prophet. lib. 1. cap. 4. sect. 15. But in the mean time, the letting go the first Ico∣nisme in this place, which is of a Camp, and not persu∣ing it to the event of the Battel, is here done with great consideration and prospection, because this Battel is ful∣ly afterwards described, and the Commander also or Ge∣neral, which is here omitted, in the 19^th Chapter vers. 11. Which is one of the main pieces of the artifice of concealment, intended in this admirable Book of Pro∣phecies.

Vers. 19. And the Cities of the Nations fell, &c. There is mention at first but of one great City, and yet here besides Babylon, there is mention of many Cities, (viz.) of the Nations: Which seems to be a destined Key whereby we might understand, that by that great City is meant the Vniversality of a number of Cities con∣sidered as one, in which Babylon it self was also com∣prized, according as we have expounded it.

Vers. 21. Their very prayers were blasphemy, &c. This is the sense which that Learned and Pious Author Peganius gives in this place, which I thought worth the taking notice of, if it may effectually force any one to make a more serious reflexion on the hainousness and hor∣ridness of the Romish Religion.

CHAPTER XVII.

IN the nineteenth Verse of the foregoing Chapter, there was a short glance at the Arraignment, Ac∣cusation and Condemnation of the Whore of Babylon. But the destruction of this Babylon being the main scope of all the Vials, this Argument may well seem to deserve a more full and copious prosecution, I mean the Arraignment, Accusation and Condemnation of the great Whore contained in these two next Chapters, namely the 17^th and 18^th. And there∣fore it follows:

1. And there came one of the seven Angels which had the seven Uials and talked with me, saying unto me, Come hither, I will shew unto thee the judgment of the great Whore; that is, the Arraignment, Accusation and Condemnation of the An∣tichristian and Idolatrous Hierarchy; for so whore∣dom signifies in the Prophetick stile: That sitteth upon many waters: who is seated amongst many People, and whose Jurisdiction spreads far and wide, and who pretends to be the Church Universal.

2. With whom the Kings of the Earth, the ten Kings, suppose, vers. 12. have committed Fornicati∣on, have joyned with in Idolatrous worship: And the Inhabiters of the Earth have been made drunk with the wine of her Fornication: so inflamed, so intoxicated and dementated with the unwholesome heat of Idolatrous zeal, that it has made them very boisterously quarrelsome against all opposers or de∣spisers of their fair Diana, and so sottish, secure, and heedless, that they have lien exposed to all the de∣ceits and injuries that this cunning Circe could put up∣on them.

3. So he carried me away in the Spirit into the Wilderness, and I saw a Woman sit upon a scarlet-coloured Beast: whose colour denotes Ty∣rannical Cruelty as well as Imperial Majesty. By this is understood the Roman Empire. Full of names of blasphemy, that is, full of titles or kinds of Idola∣try, full of gods, so Grotius interprets it, understand∣ing it of the Pagan Empire: And we may safely ren∣der it, full of Daemons in M^r Medes sense, that is, full of superstitious and idolatrous worship of the souls of the Saints departed (besides other Idolatries in the man∣ner of worshipping the due object of our Religion God and Christ) since the Empire has become Paga∣nochristian: Having seven heads and ten horns, which the Angel interprets vers. 9.12.

4. And the woman was arayed in purple and scarlet colour, and decked with gold and precious stone and pearls; that is to say, this Idolatrous Hie∣rarchy, the Patriarchs or Popes especially and Cardi∣nals, &c. have this Imperial colour and richness, very gorgeously apparelled upon occasions in their rich Copes and costly Miters, to say nothing of the fur∣niture of their Altars: Having a golden cup in her hand full of abominations and filthiness of her for∣nication: An enchanted Cup or Philter, an intoxica∣ting Love-potion to inflame the Empire again with a whorish desire after Idols. And it is further obser∣vable, that the very metal of the Cup has a natural Magick with it to draw and allure men to her, and at a distance to intoxicate the brains of their Clergy with the fumes of ambition and covetousness, who are not enriched with the golden gifts of their Church, but upon the condition of assisting and abetting the Idolatry thereof.

5. And upon her forehead was a name written: By way of allusion to some impudent Harlots, who had their names written upon their foreheads: My∣stery Babylon the great, the Mother of Harlots, and abominations of the Earth. The first word is a Key to the rest, and is to be understood in such a sense as that, Chap. 11. vers. 8. The great City which is spiritually called Sodom and Aegypt. For in neither place is it a mere ordinary Synecdoche putting one Heathenish City for another. For what Mysterious∣ness or Spiritualness could there be in that? But it is a Christian Polity or Hierarchy so degenerated into unchristian Tyranny and Idolatry, that it is mystically or spiritually set out by the name Aegypt in that Chap∣ter, and here by the name of Babylon the great: Ba∣bylon, as holding the Children of God in such an hard Captivity, and also propagating, as they, the worship of Baalim, of Daemons, or false gods; so this Hierar∣chy of Saints, and Angels, and Images, and other Ido∣latries: Great, as pretending to be the Church Ca∣tholick or Universal, and having indeed a large ex∣tent of Jurisdiction in the Christian world: Mother of Harlots, by way of reproach to her affectation of being accounted and called Holy Mother the Church, when she is yet so unholy as to be the Author of the Abominations of the Earth, that is, of Idols or Image worship: For so 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 is translated by the seventy Interpreters: But to understand here, by Babylon, Rome Heathen, one Pagan City for another, certain∣ly would be but a dry Synecdoche, no mystery at all. This Whore of Babylon therefore is the same with the two-horned Beast, that had the horns of a Lamb, that is, pretended to be a Christian Hierarchy, but spake as a Dragon, that is, Decreed gross Idolatries, and

cruel persecutions: As here one part of the Charge laid against this Whore of Babylon is Idolatry, and the other part follows in the next Verse: Her bloody per∣secutions.

6. And I saw the woman drunk with the blood of the Saints, and with the blood of the Martyrs of Iesus. To be drunk with the blood of the Saints shows her excessive and unsatiable cruelty in persecu∣ting them, not only burning them with fire and fa∣got, but destroying them with repeated massacres, insomuch that those that have made a careful com∣pute of their murders and cruelties have found them to exceed the bloodiness and cruelty of the Pagans against the Primitive Christians under the Red Dra∣gon: And when I saw her, I wondered with great admiration: To see a Woman so nobly and splen∣didly attired, drunken and defiling her garments with blood, and that God should permit so great impiety and wickedness, and so great prosperity, to consort together: But that Iohn might the better understand the comprehension of Gods wayes and Providence touching his Church, the Angel unfolds the riddle to him.

7. And the Angel said unto me, Wherefore didst thou marvel? I will tell thee the mystery of the Woman and of the Beast that carrieth her, which hath the seven heads and ten horns; namely, on his seventh head, that thou mayest be satisfied touch∣ing the wayes of the Providence of God.

8. The Beast which thou sawest, * his name is (and the occasion of it taken from the intercessation of Paganism, when the Empire becomes Christian, which to your comfort will come to pass) his name is, was and is not, and shall ascend out of the bot∣tomless

pit, and go into perdition; that is to say, the Roman Empire, which is understood by the Beast with seven heads and ten horns, is represented here under such a state or condition, that at some time it might be said truly of it in its prefiguration, that it is the Beast, that was and is not; which was only true in the time of pure Christianity obtaining in the Em∣pire, that is, from Constantines time, suppose, to the Apostasie of the Church into Antichristianism or Ido∣latry. For the Beast is the Empire Idolatrizing, which Idolatrizing Empire ceased to be in the reign of the pure Christian Caesars: but being there would be an Apostasie again into a kind of Paganochristian Idola∣try in the Empire, and so the Empire become a Beast again; it is therefore called the Beast, that was, name∣ly, under the Paganical Idolatry, but is not, namely in that time, that pure Christianity is the Religion of the Empire, but should be afterwards, which is expres∣sed by, And shall ascend out of the bottomless pit. The word in the Greek is 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which may signifie both the bottomless pit, and the sea, the latter denoting multitudes of people, of which this Beast would con∣sist, the other the original of this horrid Apostasie into Idolatry again, as coming from the pit of hell it self, and the deceits of the Devil. But to mitigate S^t Iohn's wonderment, there is at last added, And go into perdition. This Apostasie shall not continue al∣wayes, but the Empire as to its Idolatry shall perish quite, and so cease to be any longer a Beast, the Ido∣latry and Tyranny therein against the Saints of God being utterly abolished: Whence it is plain, that not the Pagan Empire, but the Empire Paganochristian is here to be understood by the Beast, and that the Times of the Apostasie of the Church are here prefi∣gured.

And they that dwell on the Earth shall wonder: As Chap. 13. vers. 3. And all the world won∣dered after the Beast, which is the same Beast with this in this Chapter, that is, were so wonderfully ta∣ken with the Beast, that they were in love with him and enslaved to him, and to the Paganochristian Ido∣latry, which he countenanced; (whose names were not written in the Book of Life from the founda∣tion of the world) that is, all are seduced, unless the elect of God, such as are afterwards termed, the cal∣led, chosen and faithful. When they behold the Beast that was and is not, and yet is: Which is the very same Beast that is called the Image of the Beast, Chap. 13. vers. 14. For the Empire becoming Paganochristian, and exercising their Idolatry upon other objects than the old Pagans did, could not be properly said to be the same Pagan Empire revived again, but rather the Image thereof, that is, an Ido∣latrous Empire, bearing an analogie or similitude to the old Pagan Idolatrous Empire in a manner in all their strokes of Idolatry: From whence it is rightly termed that was, as being Idolatrous, as the Pagan Empire was; and is not, that is to say, is not that very Pagan Empire, their Idolatry now having new objects; and yet is, (viz.) because the Idolatry is the same though disguised under new titles and objects. This is the easie and natural sense of this description of the Beast, and which necessarily imports that the Roman Empire is here understood in that succession of Time, wherein it had apostatized from the pure Christian worship into Idolatry: And that therefore the Woman that rides this Beast can be no Pagan Po∣lity, but the Paganochristian Hierarchy.

9. And here is the mind which hath wisdom; that is, here lies a meaning of a great Arcanum or se∣cret: For so the Greek word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 seems to insinu∣ate. For wisdom is according to her name, and is not manifest to the vulgar, Ecclesiastic. 6.22. The se∣ven Heads are the seven Mountains on which the Woman sitteth: Which haply has a glance at Con∣stantinople, as well as Rome, both these Cities having seven Mountains, and the Greek Clergy having defi∣led the Eastern Church with Idolatry, as well as the Latine Church the Western: And the horns of the two-horned Beast we did above interpret of these two Patriarchates, Rome and Constantinople.

10. And there are seven Kings, (viz.) seven forms of Soveraignty or Supreme Magistracy in the Roman Common-wealth or Empire: the division of the succession of which is naturally made thus: The Soveraignty is either in many or in one; in many, as Consuls, Tribuni militum, Triumviri; in one, as Kings, Dictators and Emperours: Which Emperours may be again divided into Pagan, Christian, Paganochristian: So that according to this distribution, the Beast will have just seven Heads of Blasphemy, as he is described, Chap. 13. vers. 1. Kings, Consuls, Tribunes, Decemviri, Dictators, Pagan Caesars or Emperours, and Empe∣rours Paganochristian: Five are fallen, (viz.) Kings, Consuls, Tribunes, Decemviri, Dictators, these Sove∣reign Magistrates had past away in S^t Iohn's time: And one is, (viz.) the Pagan Caesars or Emperours, these were in being in his time: And the other is not yet come, (viz.) the other King, for the enume∣ration now is of Kings in the largest sense: There∣fore this other King is the Christian Caesar or Empe∣rour who had not appeared upon the stage yet. And

when he cometh he must continue a short space: The succession of the pure Christian Emperours will last but a while, the Apostasie not long after being to come in.

11. And the Beast that was and is not, which above was called the Beast that was, and is not, and yet is; the Head, suppose of this Beast, he is the eighth King or Soveraign, which are the Paganochri∣stian Caesars, at least till the Pope make himself Caesar, or Supreme Paganochristian; for Paganochristian Su∣premacy constitutes the eighth King or seventh Head of Blasphemy: As it follows, And is of the seven, that is, and is of the seven Kings, that are the seven Heads of the Beast, and consequently Idolatrous: For though there be eight Kings, yet there are but seven Heads of the Beast, the Beast ceasing to be under the Christian Caesars, who therefore could be no head of the Beast, as being not Idolatrous themselves, and the Idolatrous Empire then ceasing. And goeth into per∣dition: The Beast that was, and is not, and yet is, or the Image of the Beast, though it reign to the last Se∣mitime of the forty two months, yet his Jurisdiction about that time was to be cut shorter, (which hap∣pened in the Reformation, when so many Provinces, Principalities, and Kingdoms fell off from him) and at last his Idolatrous Power and Tyranny shall be quite abolished: As is supposed in several passages in the lamentation over Babylon in the following Chap∣ter.

12. And the ten Horns which thou sawest are ten Kings, which have received no Kingdom as yet; namely in S^t Iohn's time, who lived in the reign of the sixth Head, under which the Beast fought, and was slain by Michael: In which battel he is also re∣presented

with seven Heads and ten Horns, but no Crowns upon the Horns, their actual Coronation be∣ing not till the seventh Head: But Chap. 13. vers. 1. there are Crowns on his Horns, because the Beast there in that Vision is the healed or revived Beast, the same that the Beast that was, is not, and yet is: And yet no mention of any Crowns in this Chapter, because it had been a repugnancy to this passage [which have received no Kingdom as yet] and there are other in∣fallible arguments of this Beast, being the Beast un∣der the seventh Head without that, so that that indi∣cation was needless, though fit and requisite in the Vision of this Beast in the thirteenth Chapter: But here that which follows supplies the omission of the Crowns on the Horns: But receive power as Kings one hour with the Beast; that is, about the same time that the Church degenerates into paganish su∣perstitions and Idolatries, will the Empire be divided into many Kingdoms, the entireness of the Empire be∣ing a lett to the appearing of Antichrist, according to the Opinion even of the Ancient Fathers. As the Em∣pire was healing into the Image of old Paganism a∣gain, and became a Beast, it grew actually divided in∣to several Kingdoms, which therefore is as much, if not more express, than the Crowns upon the ten horns of the healed Beast, Chap. 13. vers. 1. And therefore the more needless to mention the Crowns here.

13. These have one mind, and shall give their power and strength unto the Beast; that is, shall be of one Paganochristian Religion, whereby the Em∣pire had again become a Beast; and shall give their power and strength unto the Beast, being ready by force of Arms, if need be, or by what other Power or Authority they have to maintain this Beast in its

beastly, that is, in its Idolatrous condition, and Pa∣gan-like Superstitions.

14. These shall make war with the Lamb, and the Lamb shall overcome them; namely at the last, by that patience and truth that is found in his fol∣lowers: For he is Lord of Lords, and King of Kings: So already by right, and his Father has de∣creed, that at last he shall have full and quiet posses∣sion, that all the Kingdoms of the Earth shall become the Kingdoms of the Lord, and of his Christ. And they that are with him are called, and chosen, and faithful. The great stress lies upon chosen and faith∣ful: For many are called but few are chosen. But those choice ones that are said to be with him are stout Soldiers, that will follow the Lamb whitherso∣ever he goes, never leave him for any persecution whatsoever, but be firm and faithful unto him, be their patience never so much exercised by suffer∣ings.

15. And he saith unto me, The Waters which thou sawest where the Whore sitteth, are Peoples, and Multitudes, and Nations, and Tongues: Even all the Nations and People in the Roman Em∣pire.

16. And the ten Horns which thou sawest upon the Beast; (viz.) under the seventh head, that is, the Paganochristian head, be it Pope or Emperour, for the Supreme Power Paganochristian be it lodged where it will, is the head of the healed Beast, or of the Beast that was and is not, and yet is: These, some of them at least, shall hate the Whore, that is, the Idolatrous Hierarchy and Church of Rome particularly: And shall make her desolate and naked, and shall eat her flesh, and burn her with fire. The making of her

desolate and naked is the stripping her of her wealth and revenues, and bestowing of them upon better uses. And the eating of her flesh may partly have the same signification; Flesh signifying wealth with the Onirocritical Interpreters: But it may also signifie car∣nal Ordinances and Institutes Superstitious and Ido∣latrous, which are the fulsome flesh of this Whore: And the eating this flesh of hers, and burning her with fire is the abolishing of these grosly Superstiti∣ous and Idolatrous Rites through the spirit of Truth and Zeal which is likened to fire. This has been done in its measure in the Reformation, when so many Kingdoms and Principalities forsook the Church of Rome, but may be further, that is more extendedly, fulfilled under the fourth and fifth Vials Politically understood.

17. For God hath put in their hearts to fullfil his will: It is easie enough to conceive, that by Gods connivence at these times of ignorance, as the Apostle speaks of the Gentiles, it might be permitted to the Pseudoprophetick Beast, through the officious assistance of the Powers of darkness, to do such Mi∣racles, and use such wayes of imposing upon the ten Kings, as would certainly enough determine them to the Idolatrous Religion of the Empire: But that they were thus certain to be deceived is the fault of their own lapse, and of the after-consequences of it, not any injustice in God, who no otherwise here is said to put in their hearts to fullfill his will, &c. than in Exod. he is said to harden Pharaoh's heart from let∣ting the people of Israel go. And to agree, and give their Kingdom to the Beast: the same that was hint∣ed, vers. 13. and so to be understood: Until the words of God shall be fulfilled: For Dan. chap. 7.

it is plainly said of the little Horn, which there takes upon him to change Times and Laws, that they shall be given into his hands for a Time and Times and half a Time, which therefore is a Time determinate by God: But then it presently follows, But the judge∣ment shall sit, and they shall take away his Dominion to consume and destroy it to the end. And that little Horn is the Whore of Babylon, as I have proved, Synops. Pro∣phet. lib. 2. cap. 14. sect. 12.

18. And the Woman which thou sawest is that great City which reigneth over the Kings of the Earth; that is, which reigned in S^t Iohn's time o∣ver the Kings of the Earth, whereby it is manifest that Old Rome is understood, not New Rome, or Con∣stantinople. For no Polity seated upon seven Hills, but what was there, reigned over the Kings of the Earth in S^t Iohn's time. The sense therefore of the Verse may be clearly delivered in this short Para∣phrase: The Woman which thou sawest riding on the Beast, whose name is, Was, is not, and yet is; is that great City that now ruleth over the Kings of the Earth, namely Rome; whose Inhabitants though flow∣ing successively are accounted one and the same City, because included within the same reputed walls and buildings, as that is accounted one and the same Ri∣ver that flowes betwixt the same banks, though the same water does not continue for a day together: Therefore the Ruling Power Ecclesiastick or Hierar∣chy of seven-hilled Rome in Italy, (as the two-horned Beasts name is Latinus, in the other Vision, chap. 13.) is this Woman that rides the Beast, that was and is not and yet is, and most principally concerned in this Vi∣sion; which contains as it were the Arraignment of her person described from her Quality or Dignity, be∣ing

Queen or Empress, as it were, of the whole Em∣pire signified by the Beast she rides on; and from her Gorgeous Apparel, and from her Palace or Chief Place of her Residence seven-hilled Rome: But the Crime or Charge against her, is, the corrupting of the whole Empire with Idolatry and Cruelty, murdering the Saints of God, and Martyrs of Iesus. Her doom or condem∣nation is very copiously and pompously set out in the Chapter following.

And this I think is a very easie, natural and cohe∣rent Exposition of this Seventeenth Chapter of the Apocalypse, and such as cannot but abundantly satis∣fie any unprejudiced Reader: But whoever will take the pains carefully to peruse, and throughly to un∣derstand the eight last Chapters of the first Book of my Synopsis Prophetica, amongst which is my Ioynt-Exposition of this Seventeenth and Thirteenth Chap∣ters of this Book of the Apocalypse, I hope, be he never so much prejudiced, if he will speak his own conscience, he will confess, that I have made out with evidence even mathematical and undeniable demon∣stration, that the sense I have given of this Chapter here is true, and that the Roman Hierarchy is that Great Whore riding the Beast, that was, and is not, and yet is; (viz.) The Empire since it was corrupt∣ed from pure Christianity, and relapsed again to a kind of Idolatrous Paganochristianism: For what Roman Polity can rule this Empire but what is contempora∣ry to it? Wherefore the Woman that rides the Beast is not Pagan but Paganochristian, that Paganochristian Hierarchy of Rome.

NOTES. CHAPTER XVII. Vers. 8.

His Name is, &c. This I intersert because it is a Prophetical Ellipsis; which is one of the Figures that make up the artifice of Concealment in this Book of Prophecies: But such an Ellipsis is so natural, that it is used where there is no such design, as Exod. chap. 3. vers. 13, 14. And Moses said unto God, Behold when I come to the Children of Israel, and shall say unto them, The God of your Fathers hath sent me unto you, and they shall say unto me what is his Name? What shall I say unto them? And God said unto Mo∣ses, I am ••hat I am. Where there is plainly an Ellipsis, instead of, My Name is, I am that I am, as is obvious at first sight. But in this place of the Apocalypse, such an Ellipsis is made use of, but purposely in such a way as that it is not obvious to discern there is an Ellipsis, the sense seeming so perfect and running so glibly with∣out one; which therefore is the artifice of concealment in this place, and without which it had not been a Pro∣phetical Ellipsis, but a common one: See Synops. Pro∣phet. chap. 4. sect. 6. and chap. 13. vers. 8. sect. 13. Whence you may more fully understand how certain it is, that such an Ellipsis is to be acknowledged in this place, and that there is to be interserted, His name is, &c.

CHAPTER XVIII.

1. THe Arraignment and Accusation of the Great Whore was in the preceding Chapter, now

follows her doom or Condemnation. And after these things I saw another Angel come down from Hea∣ven, having great power: which intimates, that those Agents that are prefigured by him, and are to effect what he predicts, are Persons of high place. And the Earth was lightened with his glory; that is, the Earth was enlightened with his brightness, which signifies that these great persons being themselves fully illuminated through the Spirit by the light of the Gospel, did most effectually enlighten others of the meaner sort by their example and godly profession of the pure Apostolick Faith.

2. And he cryed mightily with a strong voice: He predicts the doom, or pronounceth the sentence against the great Whore with a strong and strenuous voice, in token of the assuredness and certainty of the execution thereof; saying, Babylon the Great is fallen, is fallen: which words, though they be the same with those, Chap. 14. vers. 8. yet they are not to be restrained to that time, which was but the partial fall of Babylon in the first Reformation, at the Rising of the Witnesses, but to be extended further to the final destruction of the Whore and the Beast under the seventh Vial, when the Beast is to go into utter perdition; which time of his final overthrow is not li∣mited in Chap. 17. as it is in the Vision (Chap. 13.) of his partial overthrow, (viz.) to the seventh Semi∣time of the forty two Prophetical months: And there∣fore this doom of Babylon contains both her partial and final destruction: And is become the habitation of Devils, and the hold of every foul spirit, and the cage of every unclean and hateful bird. The desolation and destruction of Babylon, which is the Roman Idolatrous Hierarchy or Polity, not a City of

Stones or Brick (a thing childish to be conceived) is set out by the description of ruined and desolate Ci∣ties, and particularly of Babylon literally understood, Isai. 13.2. And their houses shall be filled with dolefull Creatures, and Owles shall dwell there, and Satyrs, that is, shaggie-haired Devils shall dance there, &c. But the mystical meaning of this place, as I conceive, is, that when the power of this Hierarchy is utterly destroy∣ed, yet in the ruines thereof there will be lurking assemblies of such kind of persons as are deciphered by Devils or foul Spirits (in that sense that unclean Spirits are said to come out of the mouth of the Dra∣gon, Beast and false Prophet) and by hateful and un∣clean Birds. The character of whom, and who are said to be without the Holy City, which appears af∣ter the destruction of this Babylon, is set down, chap. 22. vers. 15. For without are Dogs, and Sorcerers, and Whoremongers, and Murderers, and Idolaters, and who∣soever loveth or maketh a lie. This is the Cage of un∣clean Birds or impure Spirits, that the ruines of Baby∣lon are the habitation of; who having now no power over others, will exercise a power amongst them∣selves: And one Aethiopian or Leopard will wash and absolve another.

3. For all Nations have drunk of the Wine of the wrath of her fornication; that is of her poison∣ed Philter or Love-Cup, whereby they have been in∣toxicated: And the Kings of the Earth have com∣mitted fornication with her: She has corrupted the Ten Kings of the Empire with the Abominations of her Idolatry: And the Merchants of the Earth; that is, the Ecclesiastical Merchants, that prog'd for great Dignities and Preferments under her, which she chaffered for the maintaining or advancing her own

interest and greatness; who are here called Merchants of the Earth in reproach to their false pretense of spi∣rituality, and of acting still in behalf of Holy Church, when their designs are really sensual, worldly and earthly; Are waxed rich through the abundance of her delicacies, that is, from the luxuriancy of her wealth, and from their accustomed luxury, the later an incitement to get wealth, that they may be in the mode, and the other a supply to their desire.

4. And I heard another voice from Heaven, say∣ing, which therefore is a commission, nay; a com∣mand from Heaven to the first Reformers, and all o∣thers after to forsake the Communion of the Church of Rome; Come out of her my people that you be not partakers of her sins; by being at her Masses, and other Idolatrous worship: And that you receive not of her plagues: Whether in this world, or in the world to come.

5. For her sins have reached unto Heaven, and called for vengeance there in the ears of God: And God hath remembred her Iniquities, and will re∣pay her in part at the Rising of the Witnesses, but pay her home under the seventh Vial, when her power shall be utterly abolished, as it follows.

6. Reward her even as she rewarded you, and double unto her double according to her works; in the cup which she hath filled, fill to her double: that is, spare her not but punish her severely for all her abominations and wickednesses; which is a pre∣diction of what will come to pass notoriously under the seventh Vial.

7. How much she has glorified her self, and liv∣ed deliciously; that is, magnified her self, or boast∣ed of her self, and lived pompously and luxuriously,

so much torment and sorrow give her: Fill to her a cup as full of vexation and grief: For she saith in her heart, I sit as a Queen. Thus she might say in the Thyatirian Interval before the Reformation, or Rising of the Witnesses, but whether she will be in that case to say so again, that will happen according as the Reformed Churches shall behave themselves: And am no Widow: But the Bride of the Lamb, the Spouse of Christ, the only Holy Catholick Church, the rest that call themselves Christians, a company of Schismaticks and Hereticks, nor worthy to breath on Gods Earth, but to be massacred and burnt with fire and fagot: And shall see no sorrow: Thus I say might she boast in the Thyatirian Interval: And if by the demerits of the Reformed Churches she ever re∣cover unto that plight again, yet the great doom will certainly at last be executed upon her, as it is set down in the next verse.

8. Therefore shall her plagues come in one day unexpectedly, and contrary to her boastful presages, Death, and Mourning, and Famine: This Roman Hierarchy shall be Politically killed, devested of all Power and Authority: From whence will naturally flow Mourning and Famine, grief of heart, with scar∣city and poverty to requite their luxury before. The word Famine is used in allusion to scarcity of provi∣sion in besieged Cities: And she shall be utterly burnt with fire: The Roman Idolatrous Hierarchy shall be quite destroyed and abolished: Then shall that in the highest degree be fulfilled, which is writ∣ten, Chap. 17. vers. 16. They shall make her desolate and naked, and shall eat her flesh, and burn her with fire: For strong is the Lord God that judgeth her: And there is neither wisdom, strength nor counsel against the Al∣mighty.

9. And the Kings of the Earth who have com∣mitted Fornication and have lived deliciously with her, that is, have been of the same Idolatrous pro∣fession with her, and have lived luxuriously with her, it being with them, like Priest like people, even to the highest Priest and highest of the people: Shall be∣wail her, and lament for her when they shall see the smoke of her burning: This Idolatrous Church having accommodated their Religion to the gusto of great men, it is no wonder, that some of the Kings of Princes of the Earth bewail her burning.

10. Standing afar off for fear of her torment, saying, Alas! alas! that great City Babylon, that mighty City, for in one hour is thy judge∣ment come. But though her judgement be come in one hour, yet the execution of it may take up a con∣siderable time. And this description belongs as well to the time of the Rising of the Witnesses, as to the lat∣ter Vials, and especially the last of all.

11. And the Merchants of the Earth shall wéep and mourn over her: As if the Merchants of the Earth were so much concerned for Rome literally un∣derstood, and could not as conveniently traffick else∣where, and buy the following commodities as well if not better in other places. Wherefore the Merchants of the Earth, as I noted above, are Ecclesiastick or Spiritual Persons, which in reproach to their world∣liness in their pretended Holy and Spiritual Functions are here called the Merchants of the Earth: For no man buyeth her Merchandise any more. The usual traffick in the Roman Church, where all is supposed to pass, or to be disposed of for money or Earthly In∣terest, now ceaseth, sith she her self ceaseth, and is devested of all her Power and Wealth: Therefore

no man buyeth her Merchandise any more.

12. No Merchandise of gold, and silver, and pre∣cious stones, and of pearles, and fine linnen, and purple, and silk, and scarlet; the rich attire of those higher parts of the Whore (as you may see in the foregoing Chapter) fit for Popes, Cardinals, and o∣ther great Personages of that Babylonish Body, and their Officers. No Thyine wood for the roof of their Temples, or for carved Idols, to whom sacri∣fice is done; (for I suspect some such allusion in 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉) no Incense for Burnt-offerings, for their adored Images. * No Images, or other utensils of Ivory, precious Wood, Brass, Iron, or Marble, which in the Text are called, all manner vessels of Ivory, and all manner vessels of most precious wood, and of brass, and iron, and marble.

13. No Cinnamon, and odours, and ointments, and frankincense, and wine, and oyl, and fine flower, and wheat, and beasts, and sheep, and horses, and chariots, and slaves, and the souls of men. No traffick any longer in Aromatick Odours, Oiles or Ointments for sacred Unctions. No man will participate any longer of her Panis benedictus, nor taste of her Idol Wafer made of the finest flower, nor sip of the Wine of her chalice, though she would of∣fer it to the lips of the Laity: For their Idolatrous Mass shall cease, and the besprinkling of Sheep, and other Cattle with holy Water by the Friars of S^t An∣tony, and all other profits issuing from them shall cease also, and the redemption of Souls out of purgatory for money. And lastly, the merchandise of Chariots, Horses and Slaves, [〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which alone being in the genitive case, they go together as one commodity] that is the Merchandise of such dig∣nities

in their Church, as whose Equipage it is to go with their Coach and Horses, and Lacqueyes to run by them; this amongst the rest will fail in the ruine and desolation of Babylon.

14. And the fruits that thy soul lusteth after are departed from thee, and all things that were dainty and goodly are departed from thee, and thou shalt find them no more at all. These great and opime preferments and dignities, which thy ambiti∣ous and worldly mind so longingly hanker'd after; 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, those fat and fair objects that make their mouths run a water so in this full Ba∣bylonish market, where every thing is to be had for money, and nothing without it, all these are vanish∣ed never to appear again.

15. The Merchants of these things, whether buyers or sellers, which were made rich by her, shall stand afar off, for fear of her torment, being solicitous for themselves, nor able to help her, weep∣ing and wailing.

16. And saying, Alas! alas! that great City, that great. Hierarchical Polity, that was cloathed in fine linnen, and purple, and scarlet, and decked with gold, and precious stones, and pearles: the very habit of the Whore above described, [Chap. 17.] and not a City of Stone and Brick.

17. For in one hour so great riches are come to nought: The sense is such as in Verse 10. And every ship-master, and all the company in ships, and saylers, and as many as trade by Sea stood afar off. If we consider what Sea signifies in the Prophe∣tick stile, the multitudes of men upon Earth, we shall not much be at a loss to understand * what is inti∣mated by Ships, namely consecrated houses disjoyned

from the rest, as ships are usually separate in the Sea. And one part of a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in that Architecture is called the Nave thereof. It seems therefore to give a glance at the Babylonish Churches abused to gainful Idola∣tries and Superstitions: Where they sell the use, the sight, or possession of several consecrated things, ex∣change Souls out of Purgatory for money, and do 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, turn the very word of God into an adulterate piece of Ware or Merchan∣dise.

18. And cryed when they saw the smoke of her burning, saying, What City is like to this great City? Like that of the Mariners lamentation over Tyrus, that great City for Merchandizing (which I know not that Rome was ever so famous for) What City is like Tyrus?

19. And they cast dust on their heads and cryed weeping and wailing, and said, Alas! alas! that great City! that great Sacerdotal Polity! where∣in were made rich all that had ships in the Sea, so to be understood as above: By reason of her costliness, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, so the Greek has it, out of that treasure of Honours, Dignities, Preferments and Offices, wherewith she was able to enrich these Merchants: For in one hour is she made desolate; that is, surprizedly and unexpectedly. These last three Verses are borrowed out of Ezechiel's lamenta∣tion over Tyrus, which was a City notorious for Mer∣chandises, literally understood, but that Rome was ever so I do not remember I have expresly read; that she should be so well replenished with all the above∣said wares to sell to Merchants of other Nations: And therefore I conceive it is to be understood of this my∣stical Merchandise, as hath been above declared.

20. Rejoyce over her thou Heaven and ye Apo∣stles and Prophets, for God hath avenged you on her: that is, Rejoyce ye heavenly minded over these Merchants of the Earth, and ye that are the Teachers of the pure Apostolick Doctrine, and declare the naked Truth of things to the world, be ye glad that the Lord has avenged the blood of your predeces∣sors upon her, the blood of the Waldenses and Albi∣genses, and the rest of the Holy Martyrs of Jesus.

21. And a mighty Angel took up a stone like a great milstone and cast it into the Sea, saying, Thus with violence shall that great City Baby∣lon be thrown down, and shall be found no more at all: The sense is, That at last there will be an ut∣ter ruine and dissipation of this Idolatrous City or Polity, namely at the pouring out of the seventh Vial. And the mighty Angel signifies the mighty A∣gents under him that shall effect it.

22. And the voice of Harpers, and Musicians, and of Pipers, and Trumpeters shall be heard no more at all in thee; and no Crafts-man of what∣ever craft he be, shall be found any more at all in thee: And the sound of a milstone shall be heard no more at all in thee.

23. And the light of a candle shall shine no more at all in thee: And the voice of the Bridegroom and the Bride shall be heard no more at all in thee. All this may be nothing else but a Prophetick Hylasmus, setting out one single thing, namely the destruction, silence, and vast solitude of this Idola∣trous Hierarchy, by the privation or absence of such gross and palpable objects as occurre in a City inha∣bited, as the noise of Musicians, the hammering and knocking of Artificers, the grinding of Mills, the light

of Candles in the night, and the singing and dancing at weddings, and the like: or else it may have a more mystical sense; as if by a Diorismus, we should un∣derstand rather the Musick at their Idolatrous wor∣ship, and by these 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Artificers, such as do technas consuere Sophisticas & Politicas, (viz.) in The∣ology and Church Administration for the interest of their Hierarchy, these Artifices Imperii in Imperio, and those also that work curious work in the Scholastick Divinity; by the sound of the Milstones their frau∣dulent profit, and by the light of a Candle, Honour and Prosperity, as both those Symbols are interpreted in Achmetes: Or Candle may signifie Consecrated Can∣dles, or Candles burning on their Altars, or before Images. And lastly, by Bridegroom and Bride their voice being no more heard, may be signified, that there shall be no more propagating of their Pseudo∣catholick Religion, the end of Marriage being propa∣gation: For thy Merchants were the great Men of the Earth: For by thy Sorcery were all Na∣tions deceived. Hitherto has been described the de∣struction of Babylon, the reasons whereof now follow, which are three: The two first are couched in the words even now rehearsed, the former of them, the Riot and Lordliness of these Mystical Merchants, they were 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Great Men of the world, and greatly worldly, ambitious, covetous and sensual, which is the very essence of an earthly mind: which how much it has been amongst the Popes, Cardinals, Abbots, and other 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, or Magnates of the Ro∣man Church, History, and the mouths of all men are full of it. The other is the debauching of the world with Idolatry, accompanied and countenanced with a pretense of a power plainly magical of changing

the Elements in such a sort as all the Magicians of Pharaoh could never do, nor had the face to attempt the like; besides other Magical feats of an inferiour rank, and Necromantick stories of the apparitions of dead Saints, as they pretend them: Whence Idolatry is indigitated here by 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Sorcery or Witch∣craft, as that whereby it is introduced. As also that Cup in the hand of the Whore is looked upon as a Philtrum, a poisonous intoxicating Love-potion made with Magick Charms, and horrid Ingredients: And likewise their being said to be deceived by these Sor∣ceries, implyes their being seduced to Idolatry whi∣ther they tend; as appears plainly from what is writ∣ten of the Miracles of the two-horned Beast, Chap. 13. vers. 13, 14. and the Whore, and the two-horned Beast are all one. And thus much of the two first Reasons; the third and last follows in this last Verse.

24. And in her was found the blood of Prophets and of Saints, and of all that were slain upon the Earth. Here is described the bloody Cruelty of the Roman Hierarchy: And there is laid to their charge not only the blood of Prophets and of Saints, that is, of faithful Preachers, and Expounders of the Gospel, and of other pious men, such as out of con∣science of their obedience due to the Law of God and Christ, could not submit to the Idolatrous pro∣fession and practice required of them by Antichrist, but the blood of all that have been slain upon Earth: So great Incendiaries have the Pope and his Emis∣saries been, and disturbers of the Peace of Christen∣dom.

NOTES. CHAPTER XVIII. Vers. 12.

No Images, or other Utensils, &c. The Greek word is 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which is of so large a sense, that Vessel, as our English translates it, does not reach the latitude thereof: For in the Byzantine History, Images of Sil∣ver and Gold are called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Holy Utensils, Instruments or Furniture, which made me render the place Images, or other Vtensils.

Vers. 13. Lacqueyes to run by them: For by D^r Hammonds own acknowledgement, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which is the Greek word here, does not signifie Slaves but Ser∣vants. I render it Lacqueyes, that attend the Coaches of Great Men, in querpo; which sutes not unhandsom∣ly with the word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, bodies: For they that run can do it most conveniently in querpo, without the cum∣ber of unnecessary cloathing, suppose of a cloak, or the like.

Vers. 17. What is intimated by ships, &c. That Ships are not rashly assimulated to Churches or Temples, besides what is produced on this place already, that in Achmetes, out of the Indian Onirocriticks, may further confirm, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 If any man see in his sleep that he has built a Merchants-ship, he shall have a Congregation of Men, or erect a Synagogue for the celebrating of Religious Mysteries: Which shows plainly, that there is a fitness in a ship to repre∣sent a Church or Temple in the judgement of others that have had nothing to do with the Apocalypse that we know; which yet is nothing at all to the derogation of the sacredness of those places themselves, they being no

Merchants-ships to any that make use of them out of a good conscience, and a desire to gain souls to God, not meerly out of the love of money: But even the best things may be the most abominably perverted, as our Saviour complains of the profanation of the Temple in his dayes. It is written,* 1.19 My house shall be called a house of Prayer, but ye have made it a den of thieves.

CHAPTER XIX.

1. AND after these things I heard a great voice of much people in Heaven: But a resemblance of what in those Times belong to the True Church on Earth, saying, Allelujah, Salva∣tion and Glory, and Honour, and Power unto the Lord our God.

2. For true and righteous are his judgements, for he hath judged the great Whore which did cor∣rupt the Earth, the Roman Empire, with her Forni∣cation, debauching them with Idolatry, which there∣fore cannot be understood of Rome Pagan: For the parts of the Empire then were Idolatrous of them∣selves. And hath avenged the blood of his ser∣vants at her hand; the causes of the destruction of the Roman Hierarchy was their Idolatry and Cruelty against the Professors of pure Christianity, as it was observed at the end of the foregoing Chapter.

3. And again they said Allelujah: And her smoak rose up for ever and ever. In such a sence as is said of the destruction of Idumaea, Isai. 34. vers. 10. It shall not be quenched night nor day, the smoak there∣of shall go up for ever, from generation to generation it shall lye wast, none shall pass through it for ever and ever.

4. And the four and twenty Elders, and the four Beasts fell down and worshipped God; that is, the whole truly Catholick and Apostolick Church praised and glorified him that sate upon the Throne, saying, Amen, Allelujah; And this is the triumphal Song, and Doxology of the True Church upon the ut∣ter destruction of the Whore, the Roman Hierarchy, in opposition to the Lamentation of her Paramours, or Antichristian party.

And this reaches to the end of all the Vials, as the Eleventh, Fourteenth and Sixteenth Chapters do: But the following verse might very well have been the be∣ginning of this Nineteenth Chapter, and the four first Verses been adjoyned to the end of the foregoing Chapter. For, for the better understanding of things, here is plainly a going back to the sixth and seventh Vials, which, (as also the Visions of the Harvest and Wine-press) are marvellously illustrated, and have their meaning certainly discovered hereby, as shall ap∣pear by the Explication; so that this will be found no vain repetition.

5. And a voice came out of the Throne, or from the place where the Throne was, namely the voice of Christ. This answers to the Son of Man who puts in his sickle, and reaps the Harvest, Chap. 14. vers. 14, 16. which immediately precedes the treading of the Wine-press, which contemporizeth with the following Vi∣sion of the Rider of the White Horse, as that with the seventh Vial: Saying, * Praise our God all ye his Servants, and ye that fear him, both small and great.

6. And I heard as it were the voice of a great multitude, and as the voice of many waters, and as the voice of mighty thunderings; which are the

symbols of multitudes of people, saying, Allelujah, For the Lord God Omnipotent reigneth; that is, his Kingdom begins to appear now most gloriously, the waters of Euphrates being dryed up to make way for the Kings of the East, to joyn in one Communi∣on with the pure Church of God. This therefore synchronizeth with the sixth Vial.

7. Let us be glad and rejoyce and give honour to him, for the marriage of the Lamb is come, and his wife hath made her self ready; that is to say, the people of the Jews are now in a readiness to joyn in Communion with the truly Catholick and Aposto∣lick Church of Christ, and that is a ground of the greatest joy indeed:* 1.20 For if the casting away of them be the reconciling of the world, what shall the receiving of them be but life from the dead? as the Apostle speaks.

8. And to her was granted, that she should be arayed in fine linnen, clean and white: And so shall not be of the number of those that at the seventh Vial shall be found naked to their great shame; For the fine linnen is the righteousness of the Saints, namely, of those that now are to be partakers of the Kingdom of Christ and of God, which consists not in meats and drinks, or such like superficial and hypocri∣tical cloaking or cloathing with Rites and Ceremo∣nies, but in righteousness, and peace, and joy in the Holy Ghost, the Everlasting Righteousness of the Gospel of Christ.

9. And he saith unto me, Write; as being a thing of great moment, and never to be forgotten: Bles∣sed are they that are called to the Marriage Sup∣per of the Lamb; that is, O thrice happy they that shall see those Times, and partake of them, and shall celebrate the Espousals of the People of the Jews with

Christ their Bridegroom, and true Messias, as he will then be acknowledged: And he saith unto me, These are the true sayings of God; as unlikely as it may seem to men, that these dry bones shall live again, (as the Jews are represented in that Vision of Eze∣chiel) yet the thing will certainly come to pass.

10. And I fell at his feet, and worshipped him: This he did being so full of joy and transport at so transcendent good news touching his Countrey-men the Jews; for whom Paul also had such a zeal, that he could wish himself accursed from Christ, that they might be implanted into him, Rom. 9. Wherefore it is no wonder S^t Iohn did so profound Reverence to the messenger of News so unspeakably grateful, ac∣ceptable and enravishing: And he said unto me, See thou do it not: For it should seem the mien of his face conjoyned with the posture of his body betray∣ed such a pitch of veneration and worship, as might seem more than Civil, and not due nor warrantable from one fellow-Creature to another; I am thy fel∣low-servant, and the fellow-servant of thy brethren that have the testimony of Iesus, worship God. Reserve such high pitches of affection and veneration for God alone, whom thou art to love with all thy heart, and all thy soul, but thy Neighbour only as thy self. And if Iohn's worshipping this Angel visible and present be thus reprovable, what is the worshipping of Saints and Angels invisible in Temples, and at Al∣tars, and Images consecrated to them, but the dregs of Idolatry? For the testimony of Iesus is the spi∣rit of Prophecie: He was not to be taken with so profound admiration and veneration of the Angel, for that he was such a Prophet, for he was yet but his fellow-servant, as also of others that had the Te∣stimony

of Jesus,* 1.21 For no man can say Iesus is the Lord, but by the Holy Ghost. They cannot be true and faith∣full Witnesses of Jesus out of love and loyalty to him, but they must be inspired by his spirit; and so their witnessing of him is an effect of the spirit of Pro∣phecy, the spirit enabling them firmly to believe and declare beyond what flesh and blood can attain to: Such a spirit of Prophecy was in the two Witnesses, Chap. 11. whose faith was so strong, that they could suffer the utmost for the Truth.

11. And I saw Heaven opened. Now follows the Vision that contemporizes with the treading of the Wine-press, and with the seventh Vial, which will give admirable light to both. And behold a white Horse: An Horse with his Rider doth signifie Rule and Command, and the colour white, Prosperity and Success: And he that sat upon him was called faithfull and true, and in righteousness doth he judge and make war. In the seventh Vial there was mention of the battel of that great day of God Al∣mighty, but no mention there of any Armies, or any Captain of the Forces. Lo! here is the Commander of the Army, Christ himself, the Eternal Logos, joyn∣ed with the Humane Nature, who in Righteousness doth judge and make war.

12. His eyes were as a flame of fire. Fire is a symbol of Intellectuality, especially a flaming fire that implies light. Thus we read of 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the fiery Intellect in the Magick Oracles, and of 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, shining fire attributed to the Soul, as being a certain Divine and Intellectual Essence, as Plethon speaks: wherefore the Logos here is rightly said to have eyes like a flaming fire, because he is not only Intellectual, but that great and Eternal Intellect, from whence all

Intellectual Beings are, as also their Operations, exer∣cised by virtue of the more pure etherial and igneous spirits: And on his head were many Crowns: For the Kings of the East by this time had submitted to him, besides what might be done under the fourth Vial. And he had a name written, that no man knew but himself. This in brief signifies the incom∣prehensibleness and imperscrutableness of the Divini∣ty of our Saviour; he alone that is it, being able to comprize it.

13. And he was cloathed with a vesture dipt in blood: This partly relates to his Humane Nature and Passion, and partly to the Vision of the treading of the Wine-press where blood is said to ascend up to the horse-bridles, whence his garments would be dipt in blood: And is a sign that these two Visions, this and that of the Wine-press, tend to the same thing. And his name is called the Word of God: which may include not only the Eternal Logos that was made flesh, but even the written Word of God also. The false Prophet, or Idolatrous Hierarchy of Rome, upon their pretense of Infallibility, had silenced not only the express Law of the written Word of God, but most coarsly and barbarously had trodden down those innate Principles of Morality and Reason, that the Eternal Word had implanted in the souls of men, and by terrour and cruel force did what she could to smother, stifle and extinguish them. But here the scene of things is changed, and the pure Word of God like a valiant Heros triumphs over the corrupt, super∣stitious, idolatrous and contradictious Doctrines and Institutes of a company of deceitful and deceivable men, which in this Vision is called the false Pro∣phet.

14. And the Armies which were in Heaven fol∣lowed him: Here be the Armies (as before we no∣ted the Commander) which belong to the battel of the great Day of God Almighty under the seventh Vial; Upon white Horses cloathed in fine linnen white and clean. A strange kind of Armature, if it were to be understood literally of such a battle as Soldiers ordinarily fight in the Field: But white horses, and fine linnen white and clean, signifie the Righteousness and good success of these Evangeli∣cal Warriours that shall bestir themselves in those dayes.

15. And out of his mouth goeth a sharp sword, that with it he should smite the Nations: This again showes, that this is no Carnal Warfare, but as it is said in the Epistle to the Hebrews; The Word of God is quick and powerful, sharper than any two-edged sword: And he shall rule them with a rod of iron; in allusion to the second Psalm, which is a Prophecie of these Times of the Messias: Thou shalt Rule them with a Rod of Iron, and break them in pieces like a potters vessel: which is a Prophetick symbol of that wonderful contrition of heart, that the word of God makes when it is sincerely, seasonably and powerful∣ly evibrated against the Enemies of his Kingdom: And he treadeth the Wine-press of the fierceness and wrath of God Almighty. This referrs to the Vision of the Wine-press, Chap. 14. whereby it is again manifest, that those two Visions belong to one and the same thing. But the treading of the Wine-press is there explained, and the Explanation ratified by this of the sword coming out of the mouth of the Rider of the White Horse.

16. And he hath on his vesture, and on his thigh a name written, King of Kings, and Lord of Lords: which sheweth the Royal descent of Christ, even according to the flesh; as if he had laid claim to this Soveraignty by descent from David the King, accordingly as it is said, Chap. 22. I am the Root and Off-spring of David, and the bright Morning Star; the Root of David, as to his Divinity, and the Off-spring of David as to his Humanity.

17. And I saw an Angel standing in the Sun; that is, those signified by this Angel stood in the most bright and glorious Light of the Gospel, or Word of God, as Sun elsewhere is expounded; by the illumi∣nation whereof they were able to play the part of such auspicious Heralds touching the victory of the Evangelical Party, that it would go on their side: And he cryed with a loud voice, saying to all the fowles that fly in the midst of Heaven, Come and gather your selves to the Supper of the Great God.

18. That ye may eat the flesh of Kings, and the flesh of Captains, and the flesh of mighty men, and the flesh of horses, and of them that sit on them; that is, the flesh of Horsemen by an 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, and the flesh of all men both free and bond, both small and great: These are the slain by the sword of him that sate upon the Horse; for the Beast and the false Prophet are cast into a Lake of Fire and Brimstone, so that the Fowles of the Air could not feed on them. Wherefore it is plain, that those slain with the Sword are those that are converted by the powerful Preaching of the Word, which is sharper than any two-edged sword: And then this great Feast of the Fowles is the Joy of Angels, who if they

rejoyce so much at the Conversion of one single sin∣ner, what a feast of Joy is it with them, when whole Countries and Kingdoms are converted to the True Faith in Christ, and are made part of his Church or Kingdom. * And that Fowles signifie Spirits, and good Spirits here, or Angels, is plain from the Cabba∣listical signification of that Word, and the tenour of this Vision.

19. And I saw the Beast, either the two-horned Beast or the ten-horned Beast (namely the remainders of him) or else both; which is one part of the Ad∣versaries of the Evangelici, or of the Armies of this il∣lustrious Heros on the white Horse: And the Kings of the Earth and their armies; that is, the Infidel party, the other adversaries of the abovesaid Heros, who with his Armies make up the Tripartition I ob∣served in the treading of the Wine-press, and in the seventh Vial: Which is another argument of the co∣incidency of these Visions; Gathered together to make war against him that sate on the Horse, and against his army; which exactly answers to, and makes a supplement of what is wanting Chap. 16. v. 16. This therefore is the Army that was gathered to∣gether in Armageddon.

20. And the Beast was taken, the ten-horned Beast, namely the remainders that was left of him at this time: And with him the false Prophet, who is mentioned also in the seventh Vial, (viz.) The Ro∣man Idolatrous Hierarchy, That wrought Miracles before him, with which he deceived them which had received the mark of the Beast, namely, of the two-horned Beast, (see Chap. 13. vers. 13, 16, 17.) which is the same with this false Prophet: And them that worshipped his Image, (viz.) the Image which

the two-horned Beast made, who debauching the Christian Empire by the introduction of the old Ido∣latry under new names, made it the lively Image of the Pagan. These both were cast alive, (viz. the Beast and false Prophet) not slain by the Sword that comes out of the mouth of the Rider of the white Horse, that is, not converted from their Antichri∣stianity to the pure Apostolick Faith, into a Lake of fire burning with brimstone, whereby their Ido∣latrous Power and Tyranny was abolished and con∣sumed.

21. And the remnant, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the rest, that is, the other of the two parties, that opposed the Evan∣gelical Armies, namely the Infidel party, were slain with the sword of him that sate upon the Horse, which sword proceeded out of his mouth, and all the Fowles were filled with their flesh; that is, all the Holy Angels were feasted and filled with the Joy of their Conversion. For this Sword is the cutting conviction of the Word of God, and of the Gospel of our Lord Jesus preached effectually in the power of the Spirit, whereby they were converted. It is here compared to a sword, as Chap. 14. vers. 19. to a sharp sickle, whereby the Vine of the Earth was ga∣thered and cast into the great Wine-press: Which Vision, as I said, is the same with this, as also that of the seventh Vial.

In all which Visions, three parties of men are plainly distinguished. In the Vision of the Wine-press, the Vintagers or Treaders of the Grapes, are the Evan∣gelical, or the pure Christian party. In the seventh Vial, the said party, are those that are the Armies of God Almighty at the battel in Armageddon, or those Boanerges's with the third part of the City, which

they thundered over so divided, (viz.) into three parts. In this Vision the Heros on the White Horse with his Armies: This is the pure Christian party in all these three Visions. But the obdurate Antichri∣stian party in the Vision of the Wine-press, is the City without which (as being a company uncapable of conviction and contrition) the Wine-press is trod∣den. In the seventh Vial the Beast and false Pro∣phet, or Babylon the Great, who pelted with Hail∣stones of a talent weight, blasphemes but does not repent. And in this Vision of the Rider of the White Horse, the Beast and the false Prophet: This is the Antichristian party in all the three Visions. But the Heathen or Infidel party is denoted in the Vision of the Wine-press by the Grapes there gathered and pres∣sed, and having their Edomitish blood squeezed out of them, (who is this that comes from Edom, with his died garments from Bozrah,* 1.22 which Bozrah the very name signifies Vintage) In the seventh Vial by those under the Dragon, (for all Pagans or Infidels are so, he being the Old Opposer of the Kingdom of the Messias) and by the Cities of the Nations or Hea∣thens, who are said to fall, as being thunderstruck at the powerfull voice of those Evangelical Boaner∣ges's over the great City divided into three parts. And in this Vision, by those that are slain by the sword of the Rider of the White Horse. For these being a distinct Party from the Christian Party, the Armies of that Divine Heros, and from the party Antichri∣stian, the Beast, and the false Prophet, what can they be but Infidels? Which three Visions therefore thus dispersed and so maimedly and obscurely described single, but so fully and certainly to be understood compared together, is one special instance of that

admirable artifice in this Book of close Concealment, and certain Revealment of the Truth in these Pro∣phecies.

NOTES. CHAPTER XIX. Vers. 5.

Praise our God all ye his Servants, &c. That is no bar to Christ his being the Precentor here, because he saith [Our God] as if it were below his Divinity to use that phrase. For his Humane Nature is a Creature: Besides he saith expresly to Mary, John 20.17. Go to my Brethren and say unto them, I ascend to my Fa∣ther and your Father, and to my God and your God: See also Apoc. 3.12.

Vers. 18. And that Fowles signifie Spirits, &c. That Fowles or Birds signifie Spirits or Angels with the Cab∣balists, that saying of R. Moses Corduero will evince; Quando Neschamah exit in hunc mundum duas Aves, id est, duos Angelos custodes ex arbore volitare cum ea. And Tertullian himself briefly and smartly, Om∣nis Spiritus ales est, hoc Angeli & Daemones; Every Spirit is a Fowle or Bird, whether they be Angels or Devils.

CHAPTER XX.

HItherto none of the Visions of the Opened Book have reached any further than to the last Vial, which takes up the forepart of the Philadelphian In∣terval. To which Church it is said, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Thou hast a little Army, so Grotius: Which

Army is that which is under the Command of that victorious Heros on the White Horse: And the effect of his victory will make good what Christ promises to the Philadelphian Church. Behold I will make them of the Synagogue of Sathan, which say they are Iews; that is, Christians, and are not, but the slaves of Anti∣christ, Behold I will make them come and worship be∣fore thy feet. The residue of the Visions of the Open∣ed Book take up the following part of the Philadel∣phian Interval, and the whole Laodicean, and so reach∣eth to the end of all: Or for more distinctness, it takes up the space of the six last Thunders, as the ef∣fusion of the Vials did the first.

1. And I saw an Angel come down from Hea∣ven, whose Commission therefore must be from God, having the key of the bottomless pit; the supposed habitation or prison rather of Evil Spirits: And the having the Key thereof signifies the having Power and Authority to do things there: For the very King∣dom of the Devil is subject to the Power of God: And a great chain in his hand, which is the Power of Legislation or making Laws, (as some, as to the sense well, though not so critically, derive Lex à li∣gando) which are bonds and iron chains to tye up the wicked from doing mischief. By this Angel there∣fore, according to the Apocalyptick stile, after the abolishing the Antichristian and Infidel Power, are those persons understood that are impowered from God to make Laws for the more sure support of the recovered Kingdom of Christ.

2. And he said hold on the Dragon that Old Serpent, which is the Devil and Satan; that is, the surviving wicked Ones of the Earth, for whom the Dragon, the Old Serpent, and the Devil is here

put, as the Angel before for those Evangelical Legi∣slators. And the Dragon is here explained by the De∣vil and Old Serpent, that the sense might not be re∣strained to the remainder of Pagans, but reach also to those of the Antichristian Party now subdued, which were the two-horned and ten-horned Beast to whom the Dragon yet gave his power: By these ex∣press severe Laws touching the indispensable duties of a Christian, not insignificant trifles and superstitions, is the Dragon, that is, the wicked ones of what de∣nomination soever, to be laid hold on. This is the constitution of the New Polity after the abolishing of the Antichristian Tyranny, where it was more safe to serve the Devil and Antichrist, than to approve a mans self the faithful Servant of Christ. This Con∣stitution of things being setled, which is dispatched within the space of the second Thunder; then it fol∣lows, And bound him a thousand years: which is the Time of the third Thunder, and of the blessed Millennium, properly so called: Which reaches to the end of the Philadelphian Interval.

3. And cast him into the bottomless pit, and shut him up and set a seal upon him, that he de∣ceive the Nations no more till the thousand years should be fulfilled: Therefore during the happy Millennium of the Reign of Christ, he is as close a prisoner as can be imagined or expressed. Which is a demonstration, this Millennium is not yet come. The Parable is of the Devil, but so as to be under∣stood of his Children here on Earth, that they shall be kept under with iron or adamantine chains of ri∣gid, severe and inviolable Laws, nor be permitted to do any thing that is really Profane, Wicked, or Anti∣christian, nor to tempt or seduce others to do it.

They shall have no publick permission or connivance for such things: And after that he must be loosed a little season, namely in the Laodicean Interval, the Evangelical Party growing more coole and re∣miss, and the Church degenerating in many from the state of Philadelphia to that of Laodicea, of whom Christ complains in his Epistle to her. This loosing of Satan is conceived for order and distinctness sake to happen under the fourth Thunder.

4. And I saw Thrones, and they sate upon them, and Iudgment was given unto them: This Visi∣on runs back (as it was usual in the former to do) and commenceth with the second Thunder: Then were there Judges sitting upon Thrones, and they gave judgement touching the Christian Confessors and Martyrs, whether under Antichrist or the Red Dragon, as follows; And I saw the souls of them that were beheaded for the witness of Iesus, and for the Word of God. * And I saw also those which had not worshipped the Beast nor his Image, nei∣ther had received his Mark upon their foreheads, or in their hands. Of these two distinct sorts it is said in common, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, and they lived, as being true of them both: and reigned with Christ, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, not a thousand years; but the thousand year, (viz.) of the blessed Millennium; but it is not said where, and therefore it is to be understood the Martyrs in Heaven, where Christ is personally and vi∣sibly present; the other with their Successours on Earth, where Christ is also present, but by his Spi∣rit; these in bodies Terrestrial, those Revivificated in∣to their bodies Coelestial and Glorified; an early pri∣viledge peculiar to the Martyrs: And therefore it follows,

5. But the rest of the dead, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, lived not again, much less were thus revivificated as the Martyrs were, till the thousand years were finish∣ed: Where 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, being made use of, and it be∣ing unproper to be said of the Confessours with those that succeed them, they being considered as alive on Earth, must needs respect those that are said to have been beheaded, to insinuate their priviledge or different condition from all others, and that though 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 might be truly said of them, as being they that were to be revived into their glorified bodies at the beginning of the Millennium, yet it was not to be said of any other men, it not being to be fulfil∣led of them until the 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, till the thousand years of the Millennium be expired, nay, till the end of the Laodicean Interval under the sixth Thunder; This is the first Resurrection: This namely of the Martyrs according to the Opinion of the Primitive Fathers, and that intimation to the Church of Smyr∣na, Chap. 2. vers. 11. when so many Christian Mar∣tyrs suffered: He that overcometh shall not be hurt of the second death, as to whom belongeth the first Re∣surrection accordingly as here followeth.

6. Blessed and holy is he that hath part in the first Resurrection, on such the second death hath no power: Namely, the Lake of Fire (vers. 14.) into which Hades, or the whole Region of Mortality is cast the Earth being all on fire. But they that have ob∣tained their glorified body, as the Martyrs do in the first Resurrection, they are sped already, and are safe from this fate: But they shall be Priests of God and of Christ; that is, Holy and Divine Souls cloath∣ed in glorified bodies, serving God in his Heavenly Temple. And shall reign with him, (viz.) with

Christ in the Kingdom of his Father, not 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the thousand years of the Millennium; but 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, a thousand years, symbolically understood; which being the Cube of Ten, which comprehends all number, signifies a steady permanent Reign even to all Eternity.

7. But when the 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the thousand years of the Millennium are expired, that is at the expiration of the Philadelphian Interval, and the be∣ginning of the Laodicean, Satan shall be loosed out of his prison, that is to say, the ancient zeal of the Philadelphian Church, and strictness of Discipline will be much relaxated, and wickedness will get head a∣gain, namely under the fourth Thunder.

8. And he shall go out to deceive the Nations, which are in the four quarters of the Earth, Gog and Magog; that is, the whole rabble of men that are disposed to wickedness, and have an enmity a∣gainst the Holy and Just, which are the true Israelites indeed, in whom there is no guile. And Gog and Magog are those notorious enemies of the People of Israel, (Ezech. Cap. 38. and 39.) who therefore here typifie the enemies of the Holy, Christian and Apo∣stolick Church, of which Israel was a type. To ga∣ther them together to battel, to fight against Israel, the true Church of Christ; The number of whom is as the sand of the sea: So much had wickedness increased by the not still endeavouring with that wonted vigour, the amplification of Christs King∣dom, and by relaxation of Discipline in the Laodi∣cean State of the Church, though purity of external worship was still retained among them, neither had they contaminated themselves with course Supersti∣tions and Idolatries.

9. And they went up on the breadth of the Earth, which indicates the swarming and the spread∣ing of their Forces, and compassed the Camp of the Saints about: The Camp wherein there were many Saints, and right Philadelphian Spirits, but all Saints, as to the purity of external worship. And the be∣loved City: The mystical Ierusalem, or pure Church of Christ, and beloved of him, for the reasons even now intimated. Here is an attempt of bringing a∣gain the Righteous under the Power and Tyranny of the wicked; which attempts are made toward the latter end of the Laodicean Interval under the fifth Thunder: But before they could effect their wicked enterprise, the Day of judgement overtakes them: And fire came down from God out of Heaven and devoured them.

10. And the Devil that deceived them was cast together with them into the lake of fire and brim∣stone, even that Lake which is afterwards called the second death, where the Beast and the false Pro∣phet, the whole Antichristian Rabble, shall be, and shall be tormented day and night for ever and e∣ver.

11. For I saw a great white Throne (for 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, And, does ordinarily signifie for, as the sense may re∣quire) and him that sate on it, namely Christ com∣ing to judgement at the end of the Laodicean Inter∣val (in the sixth Thunder) from whence the Church of Laodicea also has its name: From whose face the Earth and the Heaven fled away, and there was found no place for them; that is, the Glory of his Majesty was so great, that Heaven and Earth seemed to vanish before him, the eyes of the spectators at first being so wholly filled with the brightness of the pre∣sence of his Glory.

12. And I saw the dead small and great, good and bad, stand before God: This is the General Re∣surrection, which is not till the thousand years of the Millennium be expired, but a good while after it, though but a little time compared with the thousand years in the latitude of the sense thereof. And the Books were opened, the Rolls and Records of their actions; this is spoken in allusion to Law-proceed∣ings in Courts of Judicature amongst men. And an∣other Book was opened which is the Book of Life. An auspicious Title, signifying that they whose names were found there, should be sentenced worthy of Eternal Life, and escape the second death: And the dead were judged out of those things which were written in the Books according to their Works: As is done in Righteous Courts of Judicature, where the Judge gives Sentence according to what is al∣ledged and proved: And so it is in this General As∣sizes; none shall be condemned for what he is not guilty of, but be judged according to his works.

13. And the Sea gave up the dead which were in it: The Souls here appear of them that were drown'd in the Sea (as being not extinct thereby, as some fondly imagine) and actuate their bodies. And death or pestilence (all manner of death by diseases is intimated by it) and briefly Hell, that is Hades, the whole Region of deceased Souls, or this sphere of Mor∣tality into which they are congregated at this Gene∣ral Assizes, delivered up the dead that were in them, that is, exhibited them to the view of all: And they were judged every man according to their works. The Divine Nemesis proportioned punish∣ments or rewards to every one according to their doings. Hitherto are the transactions of this General

Assizes, and the passing of judgement on those that were called to the Bar, which takes up the sixth Thunder: But in the seventh there is Thundering and Lightening, properly so called, as is intimated, vers. 9. And fire came down from God out of Heaven and de∣voured them: So here.

14. And Death and Hell were cast into the lake of fire; that is, this whole Region of Mortality above which the Spirits of Devils and damned Souls cannot emerge, but are chained and confined to this caligi∣nous Atmosphere, will be set on fire at the last Thun∣der, which together with eruptions from beneath will cause a dreadful Conflagration, and turn the Earth as it were into one great lake of fire. This is the sense of these words, And Death and Hell were cast into the lake of fire. Which is a very figurative ex∣pression; First by a Prosopopoeia making Death and Hell as it were two persons, as in Chap. 6. vers. 8. and then by an Hypallage, casting them into the fire, when as the fire is rather cast into them, it occupying all this Region of Mortality, and putting an end to dying, by consuming all the species of mortal Creatures, and giving a stop to their propagation. This is the se∣cond Death: As the first death is the death of this body. Wherefore it is here a seasonable monition: Fear not them which kill the body,* 1.23 but rather fear him which is able to destroy both body and soul in hell: which is the second death infinitely worse than the former.

15. And whosoever was not found written in the Book of Life, that is, in the Book of Life of the Lamb, as a faithful Soldier, and true Member of his Kingdom, was cast into the lake of fire, and under∣went the same doom with the Apostate Spirits; which implies, that those which were found in that Book of

Life were adjudged to the enjoyment of Eternal Life, to reign with Christ for ever in Heaven in the King∣dom of his Father, as he promises in his Epistle to the Church of Laodicea.

NOTES. CHAPTER XX. Vers. 4.

And I saw also those that had not worshipped the Beast, &c. That the beheaded and these are two distinct sorts of persons, methinks is plainly enough insinuated in the Original; 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 &c. He saw the souls of them that were be∣headed for the witness of Jesus, and for the Word of God, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, and those who had not worshipped, &c. David Pareus supposes an Ellipsis, which he would supply thus, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, so secure is he, that two several sorts are meant. If this be not the sense, why is 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 interposed? 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, had been suffi∣cient without 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 before it; 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, or 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. So the Text should have run: And besides, why is it said 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, and they lived; and not 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, and they lived again, if both the Beheaded and the Not-worshippers of the Beast were of the same kind? But indeed Interpreters do generally understand them to be of two sorts, (though otherwise they cannot hit it among themselves about the sense of this place) the one sort Martyrs, the other Confessours. And I add surviving Confessours, who with their Suc∣cessours survive the Cruelty of the Beast and his Image: See my Mystery of Godliness, lib. 5. cap. 15. sect. 6.

CHAPTER XXI.

1. ANd I saw a new Heaven and a new Earth: One would think upon the Conflagration of this Earth immediately mentioned before: But this is but the artificial embellishing of the outward Cor∣tex of this Book of Prophecies in this place * by a Lemmatosynechia, as it is called in my Synopsis Prophe∣tica: For the first Heaven and the first Earth were passed away: namely the former Heaven and Earth or World, in the sense of the Prophetical stile, ac∣cording to which they denote a Polity; which there∣fore intimates here, that the Tyrannical and Idola∣trous Polity of the Beast and the false Prophet, which is the great Whore, or great City of Babylon was now abolished, as appears by Chap. 19. vers. 20. And there was no more Sea; no unquiet multitudes of the wicked who are like the raging waves of the Sea foam∣ing out their own shame;* 1.24 Tumults, War and Blood∣shed was under that Polity, that is cast into the Lake of Fire, Chap. 19. vers. 20 which was the Reign of Antichrist. But now the Reign of Christ is at hand, who is the true Melchizedec King of Salem or Ieru∣salem, King of Righteousness and Prince of Peace: This Vision therefore goes back to the second Thun∣der.

2. And I Iohn saw the Holy City New Ierusa∣lem: The truly Holy City, not pretended Holy Church, and the New Jerusalem, not that Old Prophet-kil∣ling Jerusalem, which is also spiritually called Sodom and Aegypt, the Roman Hierarchy, where Christ in his Faithful Witnesses were persecuted to death. This sight therefore of the City Ierusalem is exhibited, as

a Polity succeeding the great City of Babylon, and in opposition thereto, Coming down from God out of Heaven, which shows it is a Polity here upon Earth, and of Divine Institution, and to be setled after the utter destruction of the Whore of Babylon, by a Council truly Holy, and truly Oecumenical, being per∣sons of pure and upright Spirits, and without all worldly interest, and moreover inspired extraordi∣narily by the Spirit of God. This is the meaning of this descent of Ierusalem from God out of Heaven, all things then being to be ordered by that Wisdom which is from above, when as the Constitution of the City of Babylon was from that Wisdom which is from beneath, and is earthly, sensual and devilish: Prepa∣red as a Bride adorned for her husband: Not as a Whore to commit Fornication with the Kings of the Earth as Babylon did. This Constitution of things is setled under the second Thunder, after which im∣mediately follows the Millennial Reign of Christ, and is described in the following Verses.

3. And I heard a great voice out of Heaven, saying, Behold the Tabernacle of God is with men, and he will dwell with them, and they shall be his people; And God himself shall be with them; namely, by his Spirit, whose presence shall sensibly and feelingly be acknowledged by all the In∣habiters of this New Ierusalem: For this is the Reign of the Spirit, or the Reign of Christ in the Spirit, of which the Apostles of old witnessed, Know ye not that your bodies are the Temples of the Holy Ghost?* 1.25 But in the City of Babylon, instead of being taught and guided by the Holy Ghost, they were forced to follow their blind Guides that led them into all man∣ner of Superstition and Idolatry, and gross Disobe∣dience

to the Laws of God and Christ, unless they would be persecuted, and barbarously murthered: And be their God, that is, their Protector and De∣fender from all manner of Evil: As it follows.

4. And God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes: This Reign of Christ in the Millennium will be with that equity, goodness and sweetness, that no mans heart that is good shall need to be op∣pressed with grief, or express his grief by his tears: And there shall be no more death; no more bloody massacrings of the Faithful Witnesses of Christ, or burning them at the stake with fire and fagot, as was done under the Tyranny of the Great Whore: neither sorrow for the loss of Friends thus barba∣rously and inhumanely murthered: nor crying, no clamours against gross injustice and cruelty, or cry∣ing out for the tortures that are inflicted on poor innocent men for keeping a good conscience towards God: Neither shall there be any more pain, by noisom and wearisom imprisonments, or what other hardships they are put to for the testimony of a good conscience; For the former things are passed a∣way: The bloody Whore or false Prophet with the Beast are now in the Lake of fire burning with brim∣stone: And Babylon the Great, like a milstone, sunk into the bottom of the Sea never to rise again: Such is the state of the blessed Millennium when it comes; nor shall Gog and Magog prevail against the Holy City in the Laodicean Interval.

5. And he that sate on the Throne, said, Behold I make all things new: A New Heaven and a New Earth wherein dwelleth Righteousness: And he said unto me, Write, For these words are true and faithful; that is, what I have told you will

certainly come to pass. There will be such a blessed Millennium as here has been hinted at.

6. And he said unto me, It is done. The thing is as sure as if it were done already. This is a farther confirmation to him of the truth of the things affirm∣ed. And this earnest and repeated assertion of this Truth is no more than needs, it being foreseen how incredulous not only those would be, whose interest it is that it were false, (the Idolatrous Hierarchy I mean of the Antichristian party) but even those, that were it not for the carnal sluggishness of their Na∣tures, might easily conceive it were their Interest that it should be true. I am Alpha and Omega, the Beginning and the End. I comprehend all within the compass of my Providence and Power: There∣fore never distrust but that what I have told will come to pass. These things reach into the Laodicean Interval: In the Epistle to which Church Christ calls himself the Amen, the Faithful and True Witness, and the beginning of the Creation of God. And what fol∣lows belongs to the last Judgement of all, the Eter∣nal Reward of the Good, and the punishment of the Wicked. I will give unto him that is athirst, of the Fountain of the water of Life freely: He that does seriously desire and endeavour to obtain Everlast∣ing Life, according to the wayes prescribed in my Go∣spel, I will give it him freely: He need not buy it by large summs of money, or what other gainful conditi∣ons imposed upon him by that Merchandizing City of Babylon; touching whose Merchandizing it is said,— Coelum venale Deusque: They set Heaven, and God him∣self to sale for money.

7. He that overcometh the flesh, the world, and the Devil, shall inherit all things: He shall be an

Heir of God, and joynt-heir with Christ in the glo∣rious Kingdom of his Father, and this certainly com∣prizeth all that heart can wish. And I will be his God, and he shall be my Son. And if Sons then Heirs,* 1.26 as I said before: Heirs of God, and joynt-heirs with Christ, if so be we suffer with him, that we may be also glorified with him, that is, be made partakers of his Heavenly Kingdom and Glory, according as he has promised to the Church of Laodicea: To him that overcometh will I grant to sit with me in my Throne, even as I also overcame, and am set down with my Fa∣ther in his Throne: Where Throne plainly implyes a Kingdom.

8. But the fearful, and unbelieving, and abo∣minable, and murderers, and whoremongers, and sorcerers, and idolaters, and all lyars, such as the great City of Babylon abounded withall, shall have their part in the Lake which burneth with fire and brimstone, which is the second death: Which therefore undoubtedly is the Conflagration under the last Thunder, which plainly shows, that from the se∣cond Verse to the ninth, is a brief description of the affairs of the Church from the second Thunder to the last, or to the end of the world. Now as after a brief mention of the destruction of Babylon, chap. 16. vers. 19. there is a large description of her, and her destruction in the two following Chapters, (viz.) chap. 17 and 18. so here, after a brief intimation of the emersion of the New Ierusalem into Being, there is a full and glorious description thereof from this ninth Verse following of this Chapter to the sixth of the next.

9. And there came unto me one of the seven An∣gels which had the seven Uials full of the seven

last plagues, and talked with me, saying, Come hither, I will shew thee the Bride, the Lambs Wife. It is likely it was the same Angel that before shewed him the Judgement of the Great Whore: Whose destroying was in order to the Lambs Wife taking place. And therefore the showing him the Lambs Wife, was to show him the main end of the effusion of the Vials, and therefore a fitting office for one of these Angels to do.

10. And he carried me away rapt in the Spirit to a great and high mountain: The height of the Mountain denotes the height, and power, and dig∣nity, the pure Apostolick Church is then arrived to. And shewed me that great City, as being the Church Catholick spread far and wide, the holy Ie∣rusalem, as being the truly holy Catholick and Apo∣stolick Church, not a City of Idolaters and mur∣derers, descending out of Heaven from God, as whose constitution and institutes are not the carnal invention of men, but the pure Laws of the God of Heaven, and the living Dictates of his Spirit.

11. Having the glory of God; not as the Pha∣risees in the old Ierusalem that sought Glory one of another,* 1.27 but were strangers to that Glory that is of God, the Glory of true approved Wisdom, and un∣spotted Righteousness: And her light was like unto a stone most precious, even like a Iasper∣stone clear as Crystal. The Luminary of this City which was instead of a Sun (for the word is 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which signifies a Luminary, or that from which the light proceeds, not the Lumen dispread from the Lu∣minary) is likened to a most precious stone, a Iasper-stone clear as Crystal: By which, I conceive, is un∣derstood the Holy Ghost; whose Holiness, Purity

and Illumination is set out by this Iasper-stone clear as Crystal: (But the Natural Sun it self is not without its scum and spots) wherefore this is the most proper symbol thereof. And the Times of the New Ierusa∣lem are Regnum Spiritûs, as the Cabbalists call them.

12. And had a wall great and high, namely for the security of the City: And had twelve gates, and at the gates twelve Angels, and names writ∣ten thereon, which are the names of the twelve Tribes of the children of Israel. The number Twelve is sacred in the Holy Scripture, for the twelve Patriarchs sake, and the twelve Apostles: The for∣mer are mentioned here, the latter, vers. 14. and both concurr in this New City of Ierusalem, it being the time when Iew and Gentile shall accord in one Faith and be one sheepfold. The twelve Angels may sig∣nifie either the safety of the City by the guard of An∣gels: For if God, by his Angels keep not the City, the Watchmen wake but in vain; or else the Pastours un∣der these twelve Angels who have occasion to admit Converts into the Church from all quarters of the world; as it follows in the next Verse.

13. On the East three Gates, on the North three Gates, on the South three Gates, and on the West three Gates. Three towards every quar∣ter, as Grotius and others would have it, in token that the Converts are to be admitted to the profes∣sion of their Faith in the Holy Trinity, Father, Son and Holy Ghost at their Baptism. Nor does this sea∣son, being Regnum Spiritûs, superannuate this Sacra∣ment, but rather call for it; according to that saying of S^t Peter,* 1.28 Can any one forbid water that these should not be baptized, which have received the Holy Ghost as well as we? There may be also no mean nor useless

mystery in the Inscription of the names of the twelve Tribes of the Children of Israel on the Gates of the City rather than elsewhere. For the Jews being a Nation under the Law, and the dispensation of the Law being to live under an external Rule, though we have not yet arrived to the Spirit of Life, it is implied, that there is no entrance into this dispensa∣tion of the Spirit, without endeavouring as well as we can, to live up to those external Rules exhibited to us from the Word, whereby we break off from all external evil courses, and imitate all good and lau∣dable actions, as well as we can, with all sincerity of heart, which is the summe of true Repentance.

14. And the wall of the City had twelve Foun∣dations, and in them the names of the twelve A∣postles of the Lamb; which sheweth the pure Apo∣stolicalness in this constitution of the Church, and in∣sinuates the safety of this Apostolicalness: For walls are for safety, and these are the very Foundations of the walls.

15. And he, the Angel, that talked with me had a golden reed to measure the City, and the Gates thereof, and the wall thereof. Apoc. chap. 11. there the Church was measured by a Man, but this new state of things by an Angel. That simply with a Reed, this with a golden Reed; which implies, that this new state of things will as much surpass that state of the Church, though symmetral to the Reed it was then measured with, as Angels do men, and a golden Reed, an ordinary combustible one, as there indeed was in those first four hundred years, (which are ac∣counted the symmetral Ages of the Church) that which was very combustible, and ought to be consu∣med. But the pure Word of God, and Spirit of Love

abide for ever. And this is the golden Reed that ade∣quately measures the New Ierusalem: For the Word of God abideth for ever, and Charity never ceaseth.

16. And the City lyeth four square; which Fi∣gure, as well as the Number Four are symbols of Righ∣teousness: And the length is as large as the breadth; that's but an explication of the squareness thereof: And he measured the City with the Réed twelve thousand furlongs: the length, and the breadth, and the height of it are all equal; that is, the City is in the form of a Cube, which plainly shows it cannot be a City literally understood but a Polity, and signifies not walls and houses but men. The so∣lid Content therefore of the City is said to be twelve thousand Furlongs, to signifie how entirely Aposto∣lical the constitution of things then will be. And to show that this City is more peculiarly described in opposition to the Roman Hierarchy, * 1.29 the Perimeter of the Cube twelve thousand Furlongs is the circuit of Ierusalem, as the Perimeter of the Cube twenty five thousand Furlongs, (which twenty five is the Root of the number of the Beast) is the circuit of Rome. But this it may be is a curiosity that might as well have been omitted, as I do also for brevity sake omit, * 1.30 That to the twelve Gates, Angels, Tribes, Foundations in the New Ierusalem, do answer twenty five Gates, Pastours, Parishes, Cardinals, &c. in the City of Rome.

17. And he measured the wall thereof, an hun∣dred forty four Cubits, according to the measure of a man, that is, of the Angel in the shape of a man, and whose measuring is to be understood humano more, by extracting the square Root: Now the Root of 144, is Twelve, which shows the height

and thickness of the wall, and being Twelve, it de∣notes again the pure Apostolicalness of the frame there∣of, and the strength of it from this Apostolical fabrick thereof.

18. And the building of the wall of it was of Iasper, the Hebrew word, which is rendred by the Septuagint 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, is 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which is as much as Ictibus resistens, as Grotius Notes; which is not to be subdued by the knocks of the hammer, but rather so strong, that it breaks all that strikes against it: In which sense the wall being of Iasper signifies how firm and inexpugnable it is throughout, and is a sym∣bol of invincible patience or fortitude, without which all the rest of the vertues are in a manner useless, especially in the day of tryal. And the City was pure gold like unto clear glass: Whence it perfect∣ly resembles the Amber in Ezechiel's Vision, which is that Divine Element of Regeneration, as I elsewhere more fully show: But the golden colour is the tin∣cture of the Spirit of Love or Charity, which high perfection (and the highest that is) of the Soul, I conceive to be here signified by Gold in this Vision where ever it is mentioned. Gold being by far the most Noble of all Metals, most pure, and most perma∣nent, as the Apostle takes notice that Charity is, which never fails, whatever becomes of other Gifts and Graces. And this City is the Philadelphian Inter∣val of the Church, whose proper character is Divine Love.

19. And the Foundations of the Wall of the City were garnished with all manner of precious stones; that is to say, the beauty of them was the garnishing, but the substance of them the safety of the City, which is the end for which walls are built.

The first foundation was a Iasper: That by Ia∣sper more peculiarly was signified the holy Spirit, that is said to be the Luminary of this City, I have noted above. But he is not only the Luminary of this City, but the first foundation of the Wall thereof, that is, the principal ground of their safety, Ephes. 3.16. That he would grant you according to the riches of his Glory, to be strengthened with might by his spirit, &c. And a little after, That ye being rooted and grounded in Love, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, having your foundation in Love, &c. which is this Spirit of Love, the first foun∣dation of the wall of this City: And which is such a Spirit as will drive away all evil or foul Spirits, such as have their haunts in the ruines of Babylon, chap. 18. vers. 2. as the Iasper-stone is said in Dionysius Afer, to be an Amulet against all Empusa's, and other spec∣ters: And others write of it, that it stops the tu∣mults of thoughts, and inconstancy of mind arising from the motions of the blood, which in an higher sense in the proper office of the Holy Spirit, of which the Iasper is a symbol. The second a Saphir: The Saphir is a stone of the colour of the Heavens, which therefore is a fit note of Heavenly-mindedness; and is said to be an Amulet against Lust: This is ano∣ther security of their City, that they set their mind upon Heavenly things, whereby they escape the pol∣lutions of the earthly. The Saphir therefore is a fit means to keep the New Ierusalem in her pure Phi∣ladelphian condition, that is to say, in the Holy and Divine Love, which is counterdistinct to Lust and Wantonness, of which some Sects that have pretend∣ed too early to this Philadelphian State, have been, I fear, over-justly suspected. The third a Chalce∣donie, which is a kind of Carbuncle, a glowing

Gemm like fire, which signifies Holy Zeal, which keeps the Philadelphians from sinking into that nau∣seous state of lukewarmness, which is so severely re∣prehended in the Church of Laodicea, and which brings Gog and Magog upon them at last. The fourth an Emerald; Smaragdus, the Hebrew word is 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which has its name from casting forth lightening, as when it thunders, whence in Cornelius à Lapide, it is called also Ceraunius. This denotes that safety which the City has by those Boanerges's, those powerful Preachers of the Gospel assisted by the Spirit, such as appeared under the seventh Vial, and batter'd down the Cities of the Nations: who serve also for the preserving their own City, better than Cannoneers playing from the walls thereof.

20. The fifth a Sardonyx: A stone of a three∣fold colour, beneath black, in the midst, white, and above, reddish: This I conceive may denote the due frequenting of the Sacrament of the Lords Supper, as the Gates of the City, with the Angels, that is, Pastours or Bishops to admit Converts, signified the Sacrament of Baptism: The Black therefore at the bottom is the Death of our Lord the foundation of the solemnity that celebrates his death till he come; the White the Bread, and the Red the Wine, the Ele∣ments that are made use of in the Celebration of his Supper. And this is a good hold to the Church from relapsing into Heathenism again, as some Enthusiasts have seemed too prone to do. The sixth a Sardi∣us, in the Hebrew it is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Odem, from the colour of Blood; which may signifie these two things: The profession of our readiness to lay down our Lives for the Faith of Christ, and also a due re∣membrance of those horrible Cruelties, Butcheries and

Massacres of both the Pagan and Paganochristian Po∣lity, the Whore that is said to be drunk with the blood of the Saints, and with the blood of the Martyrs of Ie∣sus, and so retain an eternal watchful aversation from so detestable a Religion. This is also one part of the wall of safety about the New Ierusalem. The seventh a Chrysolith, or the stone that has its de∣nomination from Gold. Whether the Philosophers Stone may be hereby prefigured, I leave to the Chy∣mists to consider; but because that Knowledge is vulgarly held the very top of all Natural Knowledge, by this Stone it's likely is signified the flourishing of the most profound and useful Natural Wisdom in this New Ierusalem, that Humane Nature is capable of. And besides, it is written of the Chrysolith, That it does, confortare intellectum, pusillanimitatem stultitiámque auferre, & sapientiam animique constan∣tiam promovere. So in this also it is plain, that there consists part of the safety of the City. But this Chry∣solith, besides Wisdom, may also signifie firmness of Love, whereby the Stones of this Living City of God are held fast together, which is an egregious ground of safety indeed. The eighth a Beryl, a Stone ex∣cellent to make Collyriums or Eye-salves of; the want of which is upbraided to the Church of Laodicea; whereby as by other defects she was made obnoxious to the Rabble of Gog and Magog, that at last besie∣ged her: This Stone therefore is a good prop from falling into the Laodicean State, and for the keep∣ing the Church safe in the Philadelphian, their eyes being cleared by this Collyrium, and enabled by their quick-sightedness, to foresee afar off how they are to order their affairs for their safety. The ninth a Topaze, which either has its name from the Island

Topazios, according to Pliny, which is so called in the Troglodytick Language from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 to seek, Mariners with much ado finding it out by reason of being wholly covered with mists; whence this Stone may be a fit symbol of a generous and noble desire of the Soul, to find out the dark mysteries of the Nature of God and his Providence, whereby her af∣fections are drawn upward from the dregs of this Earth: Or else, as some would have it, the word may be made of the Article 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 and 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which is from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Aurum solidum, solid Gold, or Gold well pu∣rified, for that makes it the more solid: This is that Gold tryed in the fire, which Christ counsels the Lao∣dicean Church to buy of him, for want of which she had become so poor and miserable. This Topaze therefore may well be a Stone in the wall of the Phi∣ladelphian Church, to keep her still in that conditi∣on, it signifying pure love firmly radicated in the Di∣vine Element of Regeneration. The tenth a Chry∣soprasus, a Gemm of an austere colour, as Grotius and others have noted, but the Golden colour being mixt with it, it signifies Animum subtristem & benig∣num, the best temper of mind in the world, and most like to our blessed Saviours. This is a great conser∣vation of that Reverence that is due to Holy Perso∣nages, when lightness and mirth diminisheth their esti∣mation. And those whom by this artifice they would win, ordinarily feed onely on the sweet of their conversation, but let the wholesom alone, like fishes that have a trick to nibble away the bait and avoid the hook. The eleventh a Iacinth, which is a Stone of a bright, clear skie-colour; which there∣fore signifies that inward chearfulness, calmness and serenity of mind in this state of the Regenerate,

which the Apostle calls, Righteousness, and Peace, and Ioy in the Holy Ghost, which they having once tasted, they will be ever unwilling to be deprived of, and therefore never like to relapse from the state of Phi∣ladelphia, or the New Ierusalem. The twelfth an Amethyst: This Stone is an Amulet against drun∣kenness, as the Notation of the word does plainly import, too frequent a vice in the Sardian Church, to be drunk with Wine or strong Drink, as it was for the Whore of Babylon to be drunk with the blood of Saints and Martyrs: But the Philadelphian keeps free from this debauchery, which is her great security from errour and danger. Of this wretched sin is that complaint of the Prophet, (Esay 28.) The Priest, and the people have erred through strong drink, they err in Vision, they stumble in judgement: Where∣fore if this Amethyst were not one of the stones of the wall in the New Ierusalem, they would soon be exposed to the Armies of Gog and Magog, that would invade the City — somno vinóque sepultam, over∣whelmed with sleep and wine. Wine and strong Drink, and all other intemperance and gluttony di∣minisheth the understanding and judgement, especi∣ally in things of the greatest importance, makes men careless, and remiss, and destroyes all order and dis∣cipline, weakens the health of the body, and makes the soul incapable of the holy influences of the Spirit of God: So necessary a stone therefore for the safe∣ty of the City is this Amethyst to be placed in the wall thereof.

21. And the twelve Gates were twelve pearls, every several Gate was of one pearl; which shows plainly the thing cannot be literally understood, un∣less there were Oisters, or other Conchae, bigger than

one of these Gates or Porches. But in that the Gates, (viz.) Inletts into the City are said to be Pearles, that Gemm sets out the condition of them that are fitted to enter into the City. For the colour of the Pearle shows the mild, innocent, child-like meekness of them that are fit to enter, as our Saviour has de∣clared: Vnless you be converted and become as one of these Children, you cannot enter into the Kingdom of God. The Notation of the word also intimates what is requisite to Baptism, (viz.) Repentance: For 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Vnio, from whence 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 is derived, al∣ludes to 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the mixture of bitterness, which denotes the wholesome cup of Repentance. But the whiteness of the Pearles may insinuate also the wash∣ing away of the guilt and stain of Sin in the Sa∣crament of Baptism, which Interpreters make these Gates to be a symbol of. And the street of the City was pure gold, as it were transparent glass: The street, that is Forum Vrbis, as Grotius notes, the publick place where they meet and trans∣act businesses: It is said to be pure gold, like to transparent glass, because they converse one with an∣other bonâ fide, in pure love and sincerity, as if they were transparent to one another, and could see one anothers hearts and thoughts.

22. And I saw no Temple there. No such Temple as was amongst the Jews; which together with the Divine Residence supposed in it, as being deemed the house of God, is properly called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Such a Temple as this there was none in the New Ierusalem. For the Lord God Almighty, and the Lamb are the Temple of it. The eternal Deity is the object of their worship, and the Lamb, the body

of Christ, the Holy Catholick Church, is the house wherein he resides, the same with the City it self, which from his presence there is called Iehovah Sham∣mah, Ezech. 48.35. God therefore immediately re∣siding by his Spirit in the hearts of his people, the Citizens of this New Ierusalem, this is instead of the Temple of the Ancient Jews: And according to the Prophetick stile, Lamb, will more naturally (though it does not so usually) signifie the body of Christ his Church, than Christ himself.

23. And the City had no need of the Sun, neither of the Moon to shine in it: This may al∣lude to Isai. 60.19. The Sun shall be no more thy light by day, &c. But the more peculiar sense of the place, I conceive, according to the Prophetick stile, (which makes the Sun the highest Power in any Po∣lity, and the Moon next to it, as an Emperour and an Emperess in an Empire, or an Vniversal Patri∣arch and Emperour, as the Popish Interpreters ex∣pound the two great Lights, the Sun and the Moon, the one of the Pope, the other of the Emperour, the Ecclesiastick Power being the Sun, the Secular the Moon;) the sense, I say, is this, That no man ima∣gine any necessity in those dayes, when the King∣doms of the World shall become the Kingdoms of the Lord, and of his Christ, that there should be any such Oecumenical Patriarch, Pope or Bishop over the Church of Christ, or any Vniversal Monarch or Emperour over his whole Empire, it is expresly said, that the City had no need of the Sun, neither of the Moon to shine in it, no need of any one Vni∣versal Prelate, and Vniversal Monarch, as some would fancy the Pope and the Emperour to have been. For

the Glory of God did lighten it; that is, the Spirit of God which is compared to the Iasper-stone, vers. 11. which is said to be the Luminary thereof; this is the Sun or Supreme Power thereof, which is to hold all together. And the Lamb is the light thereof; namely by shedding the promised efficacy of his Spirit into it. The Kings therefore of those many Kingdoms, that in those dayes become the Kingdom of Christ, shall have no other Supreme Head over them but Christ himself, but be as the four and twenty Crowned Elders before the Throne of the Lamb, and have no other Superiour, neither Patriarch nor Monarch but he. Of those times is said that of Isai. chap. 24.23. Then the Moon shall be confounded, and the Sun ashamed, (all that have born themselves as Universal Monarchs in Church or State hitherto) when the Lord of Hosts shall reign in Mount Sion and Ierusalem, namely in this New Ie∣rusalem, and before his Ancients gloriously; those An∣cients described, Chap. 4. as cloathed with white ray∣ment, and sitting upon Thrones with golden Crowns on their Heads; which signifie the Kings of those Times when Jew and Gentile shall make one Fold, and the Church be reduced to her Apostolick puri∣ty in the blessed Millennium; over whom there will be no Head but God and Christ, nor will they have need to be held together in one Universal Kingdom of Christ by any other Tye than his Laws, and the Union of his Holy Spirit, which will be so abun∣dantly shed forth in their hearts in those days, name∣ly in the Philadelphian Succession.

24. And the Nations of them that are saved shall walk in the light of it: Extra Ecclesiam nul∣la

est salus, is a maxime amongst the Pontificians, confining Salvation to a blind implicit Faith in the Infallibility of their Pope and Church: But the Ia∣sper-stone, the influence of the Holy Spirit, which is the Light of this City, is that by whose guidance the Nations now walk in the wayes of Salvation: And the Kings of the Earth do bring their Glory and Honour into it; that is, turn Converts to this dispensation of the Spirit, where the Word and the Spirit is the Rule, not the blind Decrees of both a fallacious and fallible Polity of men, that adulterate Doctrine for their worldly interest.

25. And the Gates of it shall not be shut at all by day: Their prosperity, and great knowledge, and illumination will not make them proud, disdainful or careless of others happiness and salvation, but they will be ever ready to embrace and admit by Ba∣ptisme all Converts from all quarters of the World upon their sincere Repentance and Conversion. For there shall be no night there, no Adversity nor Ig∣norance in this Philadelphian Interval, while the Eternal Spirit of Love shines upon them: And there∣fore they will be alwayes ready at every one of their twelve Gates standing open to all the four quarters of the world, to admit all single-hearted and sincere Proselytes.

26. And they shall bring the Glory and Honour of the Nations into it: The best Spirits, and the most Noble and Considerable Persons of all Nati∣ons will flow in to them, and be proselyted by them, be admitted Citizens of the New Ierusalem, and Mem∣bers of this truly Holy Catholick and Apostolick Church of Christ.

27. But (for so may 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 signifie) there shall in no wise enter into it * any thing, any person, that defileth, or is of a scandalous conversation, neither whatsoever, whosoever worketh abomination, that is, committeth Idolatry, though the Whore of Ba∣bylon would admit none but such, or maketh a lye. No Legend-mongers, nor obtruders of absurd and impossible Doctrines, such as the Artificers of Baby∣lon forged for filthy lucre-sake, no such may be ad∣mitted to come into this City, whose Gates are pure Pearl: But they only who are written in the Lambs Book of Life, as breathing after a Life su∣table to his: But the description of this Glorious City is not yet finished, it reaches further into the five first Verses of the following Chapter.

NOTES. CHAPTER XXI. Vers. 1.

By a Lemmatosynechia as it is called, &c. Lem∣matosynechia is an Apocalyptick Scheme or Figure, whereby, as the word signifies, the Cortex, or outward Letter of the Text is held together, or continued in such sort, as if there were a real connexion and depen∣dance of one part upon the other, when as in the in∣ward sense there is no such matter: An elegant instance of this is to be found, Chap. 16. vers. 18, 19. where upon the mention of the great Earthquake it is present∣ly said: And the great City was divided in three parts; as if that Division had been a diruption caused by that Earthquake, when as what is meant by that

great City, were three distinct parties before. A like example of this figure is also, Chap. 11. vers. 7, 8, 9. where the two Witnesses are said to be slain, as it were at the ending of their witnessing, and their dead bo∣dies to lye three dayes and an half unburied, where the three dayes and an half are set at the end of the One thousand two hundred and sixty dayes, as if they were the latter end of them, when as they in truth com∣mence as high as the One thousand two hundred and sixty dayes, and the same time with them. But the Parable runs smooth in the outward Cortex, as if they were distinct, and the death of the Witnesses for three dayes and an half together, occasioned by their One thousand two hundred and sixty dayes prophesying: See also, Chap. 19. vers. 5. But as eximious as any is this present example of a Lemmatosynechia, the men∣tion of a New Heaven and a New Earth being imme∣diately made upon the burning of this Natural Earth: Which therefore in the Cortex implyes, that the de∣stroying of that gave occasion of making a New Hea∣ven and a New Earth, when as they are not Natu∣ral but Political, as both Grotius and Doctor Ham∣mond acknowledge, and the Text will extort it from any one that reads this twenty first Chapter conside∣rately.

Vers. 27. Any thing, any person, &c. It is usual with S^t John to put the Neuter Gender for the Ma∣sculine, as Joh. 6. vers. 36, 38, 40. See Grotius upon the place.

CHAPTER XXII.

1. AND he shewed me a pure River of Wa∣ter of Life, clear as crystal, proceeding out of the Throne of God, and of the Lamb: What this River may signifie, that in * 1.31 Amos may be a Key to: Let Iudgement run down as water, and Righteousnesse as a mighty stream. Again, touch∣ing the uttering of Divine and Holy Doctrines, it is said of God, Ecclesiastic. 24.25. He filleth all things with his Wisdom, as Phison and as Tigris in the time of the new fruits. He maketh the Vnder∣standing to abound like Euphrates, and as Jordan in the time of Harvest, &c. Wherefore this River of water of Life from the Throne of God, is the faith∣full and effectual Administration of Justice, and pouring forth Holy and Wholesom Doctrines and Monitions in the demonstration of the Spirit, by them that are in highest Authority, in this City of God, which Authority is understood by the Throne of God, and of the Lamb, who in right of his Father is Supreme Governour over all, and the immediate actuator of his Vicegerents.

2. In the midst of the street of it, that is, in the midst of the Forum of the City, or broad open place where their meetings were to serve God, con∣sult of their Affairs, and administer Justice. And of either side of the River, which ran from thence through the City, was there the tree of Life, that is, Trees of Life, else how could they be in rowes on this side and that side the River? By which

Trees, according to the Prophetick stile, must be un∣derstood Men, and that not of the meaner sort, but Grandees in Church and State. And being they are called Trees of Life, it intimates a state quite contrary to that of the wicked; (Iud. 12.) Trees whose fruit withereth, without fruit, twice dead, &c. beside that it signifies, that the Life of the Lamb is in them: Which bare twelve manner of fruits, and all worthy the profession of the pure Aposto∣lick Faith; and yielded her fruit every month of the year: So uncessant are they in the bringing forth the fruits of true Faith, which are good Works. Here seems to be an allusion to the de∣scription of the Righteous Man, Psalm 1. He shall be as a Tree planted by the Rivers side, &c. And of these happy times of the Messias in the expected Millennium, is that, Psalm 72.7. understood: In his dayes shall the Righteous flourish, like a Palm Tree, as it is elsewhere said; or, like a Cedar in Lebanon. The sense therefore is, That by the free current of Justice, and the countenancing pure Do∣ctrine from the Higher Powers, which the Throne of God intimates, Holy and Good Men both in Church and State will be in Authority and Esteem to manage the Affairs of Christ's Kingdom, obli∣ging all unto them by their Christian Goodness and Equity, which is the constant Fruit which they bear. And the leaves of the Tree were for the healing of the Nations; that is, the People of those several Nations which are then brought un∣der the Empire of Christ: Which is an insinuati∣on of the gentle but effectual Healing Discipline, which will be in this Philadelphian Interval. Those

are the leaves of these Trees to heal the sores of the People, by gently drawing away the corruption, whatever may be remaining in them.

3. And there shall be no more curse; no 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. No more furious Papal Anathema's, or Excommunications to depose Kings and Princes, and to involve the Christian World in blood. But the Throne of God and of the Lamb shall be in it: that is, Christ shall be in it. The meek Em∣pire of the Lamb of God shall obtain after the Tyranny of the bloody Antichrist, or two-horned Beast, who wore the Horns of the Lamb, falsly pretending to be his Vicar, but spoke like the Dragon, decreeing Idolatries, and barbarous perse∣cutions: And his servants shall serve him, they shall serve him with a willing and prompt mind in this day of his power.

4. And they shall see his face; They will en∣joy the full light of the Glory of God in the face of Jesus Christ. His Life and his Spirit will be most palpably and sensibly revealed in them. And his name shall be in their foreheads. It shall also be plain to all from their outward Conver∣sation, whose they are, and to whom they belong, (viz.) That they are the faithful Servants of Je∣sus.

5. And there shall be no night there: No ig∣norance, nor any persecution for not being igno∣rant, and for not admitting of things blasphemous and impossible. That ignorance is the Mother of Devotion will be out of date in those days, which Principle sate like the darkness of midnight on the Church during the time of the Idolatrous Hierar∣chy.

And they need no candle, no factitious lights or false Instructions of carnal men: Nor the light of the Sun, no pretended Infallibility of the Pope, whom his flatterers make the Universal Sun of the Christian World, and put the Emperour like the Moon under his feet. For the Lord God giveth them light; namely, by his Word and by his Spi∣rit, and they shall be no longer slaves to the cun∣ningly contrived Opinions of men. And in this freedom of the Light of the Word and Spirit they shall reign for ever and ever, that is, this King∣dom of Christ shall never be subjected again to the power of the wicked. Nor shall that numerous rabble of Gog and Magog, be able to take this City, but it shall continue to the visible Coming of Christ to judgement, and his sentencing all the Ungodly to the Lake burning with fire and brim∣stone, which is the second Death.

6. And he said unto me, These things are faithfull and true; namely, these predictions of the Excellent state of the Church in the Phila∣delphian Interval, described or set out by the New Ierusalem, and as stupendious as it may seem to flesh and blood, yet is a most certain truth. And the Lord God of the holy Prophets sent his An∣gel to shew unto his Servants, both this great Mystery of the New Ierusalem, and other things, the things which must shortly be done, namely un∣der the first six Seals.

7. Behold, I come quickly to support my Church in her Smyrnean condition under the se∣cond, third, fourth and fifth Seals, and to deliver her from her Persecutions under the sixth. Bles∣sed

is he that keepeth the sayings of the Prophe∣cy of this Book: that is, That observeth what is writ therein for his own Direction and Com∣fort.

8. And I Iohn saw these things and heard them, and when I had heard and seen I fell down to worship before the feet of the Angel which shewed me these things; and amongst other things, the great Glory of the Catholick or Uni∣versal Church, set out by the description of the New Ierusalem: Which did so overcome him with joy, as that assurance of the Conversion of his own Countrey-men the Jews, that again he was carryed away into the greatest Affection and Ve∣neration for the Messenger of such enravishing news.

9. Then saith he unto me, See thou do it not: For I am thy fellow-servant, and the fel∣low-servant of they Brethren the Prophets, (viz.) of those that truly believe in, and bear witness of Jesus Christ by the inspiration of the Holy Ghost. And of them which keep the sayings of this Book: That observe them, understand them, and believe them, and have faith and courage to act ac∣cordingly: which no man can do, but by the pow∣er of the Spirit of God: Worship God: Accord∣ingly as our Saviour has prescribed, Thou shalt wor∣ship the Lord thy God, and him onely shalt thou serve.

10. And he saith unto me, Seal not the say∣ings of the Prophecy of this Book, as if it con∣cerned onely Times afar off, or many ages to come: For the time is at hand, that is, The time of ex∣ercising

the Faith of the true Followers of Christ in the Smyrnean Interval of the Church, and of discovering the barbarous and brutish cruelty of Pa∣ganism against them: Which Tragedy will be act∣ed over again in the Pergamenian and Thyatirian In∣tervals of the Church by a Pagano-christian Syna∣gogue; whereby the Faith of the True Church will be exercised, and more illustriously appear, and the wickedness of a false hypocritical Hierarchy more notoriously manifested to the World, Divine Pro∣vidence administring occasion for the discovering both in their colours, not forcing the Wills of either by his Absolute Omnipotency. Whence it follows in the next Verse:

11. He that is unjust let him be unjust still, and he that is filthy let him be filthy still: Let their unjust cruelty, and barbarous persecution, and foulness of Life, and filthiness of Idolatry go on in the Pagan, and afterwards in the Pagano-christian Polity, till they are ripe for Judgment, I will not stop them. And he that is righteous let him be righteous still, and he that is holy let him be holy still; that is, increase more and more in ho∣nesty of Conversation, unblameableness of Life, and purity in Religion, and in Zeal against all Idola∣try, not refusing the assistances of my Spirit and Grace.

12. And behold I come quickly, and my re∣ward is with me, to give every man according as his work shall be. I will demolish or abolish the Pagan Religion, and set up the Christian under the sixth Seal in the Reign of Constantine, and judge the Whore, the Idolatrous Hierarchy under the sixth

Trumpet, and utterly destroy her under the seventh Vial, and he that is righteous growing still more righteous, and he that is holy still more holy, in∣troduce the glorious State of the New Ierusalem un∣der the second Thunder. These things are within the compass of my Providence and Power, and there∣fore will certainly come to pass. For,

13. I am Alpha and Omega, the Beginning and the End, the First and the Last. My King∣dom shall out-last all Kingdoms, neither shall any Power upon Earth survive my Reign in the Holy City Ierusalem: Whence follow the words of Saint Iohn, as relating to those Times.

14. Blessed are they that do his Command∣ments, that walk uprightly according to the ex∣ternal Word or Law: That they may have right to the Tree of Life; that is, be baptized at last into the dispensation of the Spirit of Life in the New Birth, And may enter through the Gates into the City, that is, be baptized and admitted Citizens, in order to the aforesaid attainment, to be true Members of this Living Church of Christ, the New Ierusalem, and enjoy all the holy and heal∣ing priviledges thereof, which have been above de∣scribed.

15. For without are Dogs, and Sorcerers, and Whoremongers, and Murderers, and Idolaters, and whosoever loveth and maketh a lye; that is, brutish, obscene and Atheistical men, and jugling pretenders to Miracles, and Kainish Persecutors had they but Power, and in the mean time gross Ido∣laters, and either lovers of lying Legends, or Inven∣tours of them: These unclean Birds are kept out

of the New Ierusalem, but have their dismal haunts in the rubbish and ruines of the demolished Babylon, as has been observed above.

16. I Iesus have sent my Angel to testifie un∣to you these things in the Churches, alluding to the Churches in Asia; which signifie the whole suc∣cession of the truly Catholick and Apostolick Church to the end of the world. The Churches therefore for whose use this Book was written, are the Churches in Smyrna, Pergamus, Thyatira, Sardis, Philadelphia and Laodicea. The whole Book of the Apocalypse is as it were an Epistle to them all, as they are con∣cerned in their several Successions. Which passage is a farther confirmation of the Prophetical sense of the Epistles to the seven Churches in Asia. I am the Root, and the Off-spring of David. * Which may denote his Divinity and Humanity; as also his being the Off-spring or Son of David the true Mes∣sias, his Right to the Kingdoms of the Earth, as it is foretold in the second Psalm, Ask of me and I will give thee the Nations for thine Inheritance, and the utmost parts of the Earth for thy possession. And therefore because of the greatness and glory of his Kingdom, it follows, And the bright Morning-Star. In the Sardian Interval he was onely the Morning-Star, (here the bright Morning-Star) which is a sign this saying glances at the Philadelphian In∣terval in the commencement thereof under the last Vial; which sutes with the saying of S^t Iohn in the next Verse.

17. And the Spirit and the Bride say Come: The Spirit, because this is the commencement of those Times that are properly called the Reign of the

Spirit by the Cabbalists: And the voice of the Bride is added as a Testimony of the Churches desire of the settlement of things into the Glorious Condition of the New Ierusalem, upon the destruction of the blood-drunken Idolatrous Babylon. And let him that heareth, say, Come; that is, Let him pray for the acceleration of so glorious a settlement of things. And then our Saviour speaks, (for this latter part of the Chapter, from vers. 10. to the end, is a kind of Dialogue, as both Peganius and Grotius have ob∣served) And let him that is athirst come, that is, He that sincerely hungers and thirsts after Righ∣teousness. And whosoever will, that is, whoso∣ever has a Will and Desire, let him take the wa∣ters of Life freely. Let him enjoy the happy pri∣viledge of this Living City of God, and so grow up in all true Holiness and Godliness in Communion of the Spirit. This priviledge shall he enjoy, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, gratis, or freely, without money, as the Prophet speaks.

18. For I testifie unto every man that heareth the words of the Prophecy of this Book, If any one shall add unto these things: Interpreters, and not without reason, take this to be a commination to terrifie men from being so negligent as to let any Errata slip into the Copies of this Book of Prophe∣cies, where every word was so curiously weighed by the Pen-man thereof; or from being so bold as on purpose to alter any thing therein, by adding or ta∣king away: * But I conceive also, there is besides this a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 sense, and that it is a prohibition from bringing in their carnal Inventions to add, inconsi∣stently with the pure Apostolick Doctrines and In∣stitutes

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

of this City: Whosoever would do any such thing, God shall add unto him the plagues that are written in this Book, whether they concern this Life, or that which is to come, the sulphurous lake of fire, which is the second Death.

19. And if any man will take from the words of the Book of this Prophecy, and be faint-heart∣ed, or of little or no Faith, and contend there never will be such an Excellent State of the Church upon Earth, God shall take away his part out of the Book of Life, and out of the Holy City, and from the things that are written in this Book. He shall never be able to enter into the blessed New Ierusalem state, by reason of his unbelief.

20. He that testifieth these things, saith, Surely I come quickly: that is, for the fulfilling of the Visions of the first six Seals, and what contempori∣zeth with them, to assist his Church, and support them in their Smyrnean Affliction, and to defeat the Enemy under the sixth Seal. To which Saint Iohn answers, Amen: Even so, Come Lord Iesus. This was seasonable for Saint Iohn to say in his time, in reference to Christs Coming to subvert the Power of the old Dragon, and abolish Paganical Idolatry and Tyranny: As it was also in the Pergamenian and Thyatirian Intervals for the oppressed and afflicted Church to say in respect of his coming to judge the Great Whore, the Pagano-christian Hierarchy, who had been drunk with the blood of the Saints, and with the blood of the Martyrs of Jesus: And in the Sar∣dian, that he would consummate the Judgement be∣gun to be executed on the false Prophet, who is per∣fectly to be consumed under the seventh Vial. And

lastly, in the Laodicean Interval, it will be again very seasonable, by reason of the inclining of things again to worse, to pray, Come Lord Iesus, come quickly, to that general judgement, when Death shall be swal∣lowed up into Victory, and all the Saints shall be translated into the incorruptible state of heavenly Bliss and Glory. And this whole Book of Prophe∣cies, being as it were one entire Epistle Monitory to the Church of God throughout all Ages of the world; as there is mention Vers. 16. of witnessing these things to the Churches (in Asia no doubt) that is, over the face of the whole Earth, and successively through all Ages or Intervals, (from Saint Iohn's time to the end of the world) Smyrnean, Pergame∣nian, Thyatirian, Sardian, Philadelphian and Laodi∣cean; This whole Book, I say, being such a general Monitory Epistle, it is but sutable that he conclude with that usual form of valediction in the Epistles of the Apostles.

21. The Grace of our Lord Iesus Christ be with you all. Amen.

NOTES. CHAPTER XXII. Vers. 16.

Which may denote his Divinity and Humanity, &c. This any one that firmly believes the Divinity of Christ, and that he is the Eternal Logos, united with the Humane Nature, will easily admit to be suggested here; though Grotius is content to understand no more by Radix Davidis than Surculus Davidis, and I must

confess, that according to the use of the Hebrew word, Radix is sometimes the same with Surculus: But being that Root ordinarily signifies that from which another grows, not that which grows from another, and that this sense here is both true, and more ample and sub∣lime, and therefore more sutable to the Genius of the Apocalypse, I thought it was more probable to be meant here; as also in the fifth Chapter. And generally the Ancients go that way, Ambrosius, Aretas, Andreas Cae∣sareensis, and others. See Ribera on the place.

Vers. 18. But I conceive also, there is besides this a further sense; and the truth is, that other sense does very hardly agree with the beginning of the Verse, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, For I testifie: In so much that Ribe∣ra is fain to acknowledge, that 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 here is only an ex∣pletive Particle, and signifies nothing at all. And adds further, how several MSS. are without 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, and Gro∣tius follows those Copies. But if 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, and the force there∣of be retained, and we read, For I testifie unto eve∣ry man, it involves a reason, why every man should close with this free Invitation made before, implying, that this excellent state of things is really intended by Christ, a state so pure and so perfect, and that all other things condemned in this Book are to be rejected. And there∣fore he that would either admit or foist in any of those rejectaneous things, or hypocritically diminish the Faith or Belief of so great perfection of the Church, as there is set out by the description of the New Jerusalem, the Commination is to him. And this threatened punish∣ment is also an argument of the truth and seriousness of Christs proposal; which I would have them seriously to consider, that make it their business to decry all hope of those good Times, when Peace, and Truth, and Righ∣teousness

shall Reign upon Earth, to lull themselves and others asleep in their sins. And farther to confirm this sense of ours, D^r Hammond upon this and the follow∣ing Verse; Whosoever, sayes he, shall go about to infuse any other expectations into men than what are agreeable to these Visions, God shall bring on him the Judgments that are denounced against Gods greatest Enemies. And whosoever shall derogate any thing from the Authority of this Prophecy, or oc∣casion mens not receiving the admonitions of Christ, (he might have added also, or their not believing his promises) contained here in every part thereof, of which that of the State of the New Jerusalem is one of the chief, God shall cast him off, and account him uncapable of all the blessings which are here promised to the faithful Christians. Which Paraphrase of this Learned and Pious Doctor of our Church on these two Verses, is not much unlike ours, which is no small Argument for the naturalness of the Interpretati∣on, in that, though we disagree in other things, we both agree in this.

Notes

• * 1.1

  See Notes vers. 4.
• * 1.2

  Eph. 5.30.
• * 1.3

  Chap. 1. Sect. 6.
• * 1.4

  Chap. 10.
• * 1.5

  Matt. 16.23.
• * 1.6

  John 14.20, 23.
• * 1.7

  Cap. 6. vers. 2.
• * 1.8

  2 Esdr. 13.38.
• * 1.9

  See Sy∣nops. Pro∣phetic. Book 2. c. 12. sect. 3.
• * 1.10

  Dan. 9.24.
• * 1.11

  Jer. 10.11.
• * 1.12

  Acts 4.19.
• * 1.13

  Dan. 7.14.
• * 1.14

  Joh. 4.35.
• * 1.15

  2 Corinth. 7.11.
• * 1.16

  1 Sam. 16.14.
• * 1.17

  Esai. 25.7.
• * 1.18

  2 Esdr. 13.38.
• * 1.19

  Mat. 21.13.
• * 1.20

  Rom. 11.15.
• * 1.21

  1 Corinth. 12.3.
• * 1.22

  Isai. 63.1.
• * 1.23

  Matt. 10.28.
• * 1.24

  Jude 13.
• * 1.25

  1 Corinth. 6.19.
• * 1.26

  Rom. 8.17.
• * 1.27

  Joh. 5.44.
• * 1.28

  Acts 10.47.
• * 1.29

  See Mr. Potters In∣terpretati∣on of the Number 666, cap. 21.
• * 1.30

  See My∣stery of Godliness, lib. 5. cap. 16. sect. 8.
• * 1.31

  Chap. 5. vers. 24.